SDV594

User Manual: SDV594

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 134 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

SERVICE MANUAL

DVD VIDEO PLAYER & VIDEO

CASSETTE RECORDER

DOCUMENT CREATED IN JAPAN, April, 2006 GREEN

SD-V594SC

FILE NO. 810-200612GRI

The above model is classified as a green product (*1), as indicated by the underlined serial number.

This Service Manual describes replacement parts for the green product. When repairing this green

product, use the part(s) described in this manual and lead-free solder (*2).

For (*1) and (*2), see the next page.

INTERNAL PUBLICATION

(*1) GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT

The EC is actively promoting the WEEE & RoHS Directives that define standards for recycling

and reuse of Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment and for the Restriction of the use of

certain Hazardous Substances. From July 1, 2006, the RoHS Directive will prohibit any

marketing of new products containing the restricted substances.

Increasing attention is given to issues related to the global environmental. Toshiba Corporation

recognizes environmental protection as a key management tasks, and is doing its utmost to

enhance and improve the quality and scope of its environmental activities. In line with this,

Toshiba proactively promotes Green Procurement, and seeks to purchase and use products,

parts and materials that have low environmental impacts.

Green procurement of parts is not only confined to manufacture. The same green parts used in

manufacture must also be used as replacement parts.

(*2) LEAD-FREE SOLDER

This product is manufactured using lead-free solder as a part of a movement within the consumer

products industry at large to be environmentally responsible. Lead-free solder must be used in

the servicing and repair of this product.

WARNING

This product is manufactured using lead free solder.

DO NOT USE LEAD BASED SOLDER TO REPAIR THIS PRODUCT !

The melting temperature of lead-free solder is higher than that of leaded solder by 86°F to 104°F

(30°C to 40°C). Use of a soldering iron designed for lead-based solders to repair product made

with lead-free solder may result in damage to the component and or PCB being soldered. Great

care should be made to ensure high-quality soldering when servicing this product  especially

when soldering large components, through-hole pins, and on PCBs  as the level of heat

required to melt lead-free solder is high.

Printed in Thailand

ColorStream and ColorStream Pro are registered trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.

Introduction

DVD VIDEO PLAYER & VIDEO

CASSETTE RECORDER

SD-V594SC

OWNER’S MANUAL

This device does not tape-record copy protected DVD Video Discs.

Connections

Basic setup

(VCR)

Playback

(VCR)

Recording

(VCR)

Other functions

(VCR)

Basic playback

(DVD)

Advanced

playback

(DVD)

Function setup

(DVD)

Others

Introduction

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, do not expose this appliance to rain

or moisture.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT USE THIS POLARIZED PLUG WITH AN

EXTENSION CORD, RECEPTACLE OR OTHER OUTLET UNLESS THE BLADES CAN

BE FULLY INSERTED TO PREVENT BLADE EXPOSURE.

ATTENTION: POUR EVITER LES CHOCS ELECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA

FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.

FCC NOTICE

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection

against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can

radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,

may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be deter-

mined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference

by one or more of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is

connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

CAUTION:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the partly responsible for compliance with the

FCC Rules could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

CAUTION: THIS DIGITAL VIDEO PLAYER EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.

TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ THIS USER'S GUIDE CARE-

FULLY AND RETAIN FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE MAINTE-

NANCE, CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE LOCATION.

USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER

THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.

TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, DO NOT TRY TO OPEN THE ENCLO-

SURE. VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED.

DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence

of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product's

enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a

risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended

to alert the user to the presence of important operating and

maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the appliance.

Location of the required Marking

The rating sheet and the safety caution are on the rear of the unit.

CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION PERFORMANCE

STANDARDS, 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION

Introduction

1. READ INSTRUCTIONS

All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated.

2. RETAIN INSTRUCTIONS

The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.

3. HEED WARNINGS

All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.

4. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS

All operating and use instructions should be followed.

5. CLEANING

Unplug this unit from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

Use a soft dry cloth for cleaning the exterior cabinet only.

6. ATTACHMENTS

The manufacturer of this unit does not make any recommendations for attachments, as they may cause

hazards.

7. WATER AND MOISTURE

Do not use this unit near water. For example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet

basement, or near a swimming pool.

8. ACCESSORIES

Do not place this unit on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table.

The unit may fall, causing serious injury, and serious damage to the unit.

8A. An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops,

excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart

combination to overturn.

9. VENTILATION

Slots and openings in the cabinet back or bottom are provided for ventilation,

to ensure reliable operation of the unit, and to protect it from overheating.

These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the unit

on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This unit should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat

source. This unit should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper

ventilation is provided and/or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.

10. POWER SOURCE

This unit should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the rating plate. If you are not

sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company.

11. GROUNDING OR POLARIZATION

This unit is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the

other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to

insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your

electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding-type plug.

12. POWER-CORD PROTECTION

Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed

upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point

where they exit from the appliance.

S3125A

PORTABLE CART WARNING

(symbol provided by RETAC)

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

Introduction

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

13. LIGHTNING

To protect your unit from a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time,

unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the

unit due to lightning and power line surges.

14. POWER LINES

An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric

light or power circuits, or where it can fall onto or against such power lines or circuits. When installing an

outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits,

as contact with them might be fatal.

15. OVERLOADING

Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.

16. OBJECT AND LIQUID ENTRY

Do not push objects through any openings in this unit, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short

out parts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill or spray any type of liquid into the unit.

17. OUTDOOR ANTENNA GROUNDING

If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the unit, be sure the antenna or cable system is

grounded to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges, Section 810 of the

National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast

and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding

conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for

the grounding electrode.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER THE

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810-20)

ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810-21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250, PART H)

GROUND CLAMP

ELECTRIC SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC-NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

S2898A

18. SERVICING

Do not attempt to service this unit yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous

voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

For example:

a. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.

b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the unit.

c. If the unit has been exposed to rain or water.

If the unit does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that

are covered by the operating instructions, as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage

and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the unit to its normal operation.

e. If the unit has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.

f . When the unit exhibits a distinct change in performance, this indicates a need for service.

Introduction

19. REPLACEMENT PARTS

When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician uses replacement parts specified by

the manufacturer or those that have the same characteristics as the original part.

Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.

20. SAFETY CHECK

Upon completion of any service or repairs to this unit, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to

determine that the unit is in proper operating condition.

21. HEAT

The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

22. DISC TRAY

Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray as it is closing. It may cause serious personal injury.

23. CONNECTING

When you connect the product to other equipment, turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from

the wall outlet. Failure to do so may cause a product damage. Read the owner's manual of the other

equipment carefully and follow the instructions when making any connections.

24. LASER BEAM

Do not look into the opening of the disc tray or ventilation opening of the product to see the source of the

laser beam. It may cause sight damage.

25. DISC

Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc. These discs are easily broken and may cause serious

personal injury and product malfunction.

26. NOTE TO CABLE TV SYSTEM INSTALLER

This reminder is provided to call the Cable TV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be con-

nected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS / Power source

TO USE AC POWER SOURCE

Use the AC polarized line cord provided for operation on AC. Insert

the AC cord plug into a standard 120V 60Hz polarized AC outlet.

Notes:

•Never connect the AC line cord plug to other than the specified

voltage (120V 60Hz). Use the attached power cord only.

•If the polarized AC cord does not fit into a non-polarized AC

outlet, do not attempt to file or cut the blade. It is the user’s

responsibility to have an electrician replace the obsolete outlet.

•If you cause a static discharge when touching the unit and the

unit fails to function, simply unplug the unit from the AC outlet

and plug it back in. The unit should return to normal operation.

Polarized AC Cord Plug

(One blade is wider than the other.)

AC Outlet

Wider Hole

and Blade

Power source

Introduction

Notes on handling

When shipping the DVD/VCR, the original shipping

carton and packing materials come in handy. For

maximum protection, repack the unit as it was

originally packed at the factory.

Do not use volatile liquids, such as insect spray, near

the DVD/VCR. Do not leave rubber or plastic

products to contact the DVD/VCR for a prolonged

period. They will leave marks on the finish.

The top and rear panels of the DVD/VCR may

become warm after a long period of use. This is not a

malfunction.

When the DVD/VCR is not in use, be sure to remove

the disc and the video cassette turn off the power.

If you do not use the DVD/VCR for a long period, the

unit may not function properly in the future. Turn on

and use the DVD/VCR occasionally.

Notes on locating

Place the DVD/VCR on a level surface. Do not use it

on a shaky or unstable surface such as a wobbling

table or inclined stand. The loaded disc or the video

tape may become dis-aligned and damage the DVD/

VCR.

When you place this DVD/VCR near a TV, radio, or

VCR, the playback picture may become poor and the

sound may be distorted. In this case, place the DVD/

VCR away from the TV, radio or VCR.

Notes on cleaning

Use a soft, dry cloth for cleaning.

Use a dry cloth to wipe.

Do not use any type of solvent, such as thinner and

benzine, as they may damage the surface of the

DVD/VCR.

If you use a chemical saturated cloth to clean the unit,

follow that product’s instructions.

Note on moisture condensation

Moisture condensation damages the DVD/VCR.

Please read the following carefully.

Moisture condensation occurs, for example, when you

pour a cold drink into a glass on a warm day. Drops of

water form on the outside of the glass. In the same way,

moisture may condense on the head drum or the optical

pick-up lens inside this unit, one of the most crucial

internal parts of the DVD/VCR.

Moisture condensation occurs during the

following cases.

When you bring the DVD/VCR directly from a cold

place to a warm place.

When you use the DVD/VCR in a room where you

just turned on the heater, or a place where the cold

wind from the air conditioner directly hits the unit.

In summer, when you use the DVD/VCR in a hot and

humid place just after you move the unit from an air

conditioned room.

When you use the DVD/VCR in a humid place.

Do not use the DVD/VCR when moisture

condensation may occur.

If you use the DVD/VCR in such a situation, it may

damage discs and internal parts. Remove the disc or

the video tape, connect the power cord of the DVD/

VCR to the wall outlet, turn on the DVD/VCR, and

leave it for two or three hours. After two or three

hours, the DVD/VCR will have warmed up and

evaporated any moisture. Keep the DVD/VCR

connected to the wall outlet and moisture

condensation will seldom occur.

Precautions

Tape

Head drum

It’s too

warm!

Wait!

Introduction

Notes and Informations

On handling discs

Do not touch the playback side of the disc.

Do not attach paper or tape to discs.

On cleaning discs

Fingerprints and dust on the disc cause picture and

sound deterioration. Wipe the disc from the center

outwards with a soft cloth. Always keep the disc

clean.

Do not use any type of solvent such as thinner,

benzine, commercially available cleaners or antistatic

spray for vinyl LPs. It may damage the disc.

On storing discs

Do not store discs in a place subject to direct sunlight

or near heat sources.

Do not store discs in places subject to moisture and

dust such as a bathroom or near a humidifier.

Store discs vertically in a case. Stacking or placing

objects on discs outside of their case may cause

warping.

Playback side

Structure of disc contents

Normally, DVD video discs are divided into titles, and the

titles are sub-divided into chapters. VIDEO CDs and

audio CDs are divided into tracks.

DVD video disc

Video CD/Audio CD

Each title, chapter or track is assigned a number, which

is called “title number”, “chapter number” or “track

number” respectively.

There may be discs that do not have these numbers.

DVD video disc

Title 1 Title 2

Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3

Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5

Video CD/Audio CD

Playable discs

This DVD/VCR can play the following discs.

• You cannot play discs other than those listed above.

• You cannot play discs of DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, Photo

CD, etc., or non standardized discs even if they may be

labeled as above.

• Some CD-R/RWs cannot be played back depending on

the recording conditions.

• This DVD/VCR uses the NTSC color system, and

cannot play DVD video discs recorded in any other

color system (PAL, SECAM, etc.).

Because of problems and errors that can occur during

the creation of DVD and CD Software and/or the

manufacture of DVD and CD discs, Toshiba cannot

assure that the DVD player will successfully play every

disc bearing DVD and CD logos. If you happen to

experience any difficulty playing a DVD and/or CD disc

on this DVD player, please contact Toshiba Customer

Service.

Disc Mark

Contents

8 cm

12 cm

8 cm

12 cm

8 cm

12 cm

The following discs are also available.

DVD-R/RW discs of DVD video format

CD-R/CD-RW discs of CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD,

MP3, WMA, JPEG or DivX format

Kodak picture CD, FUJICOLOR CD format

Some of these discs may be incompatible.

DVD

video

discs

Video

CDs

Audio

CDs

DIGITAL VIDEO

Maximum

playback time

Disc

Size

Approx. 4 hours

(single sided disc)

Approx. 8 hours

(double sided disc)

Approx. 80 minutes

(single sided disc)

Approx. 160 minutes

(double sided disc)

Approx. 74 minutes

(single sided disc)

Approx. 20 minutes

(single sided disc)

Approx. 74 minutes

(single sided disc)

Approx. 20 minutes

(single sided disc)

Audio

Video

(moving

pictures)

Audio

Video

(moving

pictures)

Audio

is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.

Introduction

Notes and Informations (Continued)

Notes on copyright

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision

of copyrighted materials including, without limitation,

television programs, videotapes, and DVDs is prohibited

under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other

countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal

liability.

This product incorporates copyright protection

technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other

intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright

protection technology must be authorized by

Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited

viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by

Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is

prohibited.

Consumers should note that not all high definition

television sets are fully compatible with this product and

may cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture. In

case of 525 progressive scan picture problems, it is

recommended that the user switch the connection to the

“STANDARD DEFINITION” output. If there are questions

regarding our TV set compatibility with this model 525p

DVD player, please contact our customer service center.

Notes on region numbers

The region number of this DVD/VCR is 1. If region numbers, which

stand for their playable area, are printed on your DVD video

disc

and you do not find

ALL

, disc playback will not be

allowed

by the player. (In this case, the DVD/VCR will display a

message on-screen.)

On Video CDs

This DVD/VCR supports Video CDs equipped with the PBC

(Version 2.0) function. (PBC is the abbreviation of Playback

Control.) You can enjoy two playback variations depending on

types of discs.

• Video CD not equipped with PBC function

(Version 1.1)

Sound and movie can be played on this DVD/VCR in the

same way as an audio CD.

• Video CD equipped with PBC function

(Version 2.0)

In addition to operation of a Video CD not equipped with the

PBC function, you can enjoy playback of interactive software

with search function by using the menu displayed on the TV

screen (Menu Playback). Some of the functions described in

this owner’s manual may not work with some discs.

Playable USB Mass Storages

This unit is compatible with USB memory devices that accept Mass

Storage Class (referred to as USB Mass Storage in this owner’s

manual). Please note that this does not guarantee that the unit is

compatible with any kind of USB Mass Storage.

This unit can be used to read JPEG, WMA, MP3 and DivX® data

for the equipment shown in the table below. However, please note

that it is not possible to guarantee that all functions are available

and some functions may not work properly for some equipment.

This unit cannot playback the DivX® VOD content protected by

DRM (Digital Rights Management) system on the USB Mass

Storage.

This unit is compatible with Nikon COOLPIX P2 and FUJIFILM

FinePix A345 digital cameras. However, successful connection

depends on the version of the software installed in the camera

and the memory capacity and connection status.

This unit cannot be used to read data from equipment not listed

below.

Please refer to “Connecting to a USB Mass Storage” for details

of how to connect a USB Mass Storage and the necessary

precautions when using the unit.

About this owner’s manual

This owner’s manual explains the basic instructions of

this DVD/VCR. Some DVD video discs are produced in

a manner that allows specific or limited operation during

playback. As such, the DVD/VCR may not respond to all

operating commands. This is not a defect in the DVD/

VCR. Refer to instruction notes of discs.

The following symbol may appear on the TV screen

during operation.

It means that the operation is not permitted by the DVD/

VCR or the disc.

For example, sometimes it is unable to stop the

playback of copyright message of the disc when the

STOP ( ) button is pressed. Alternatively, this symbol

may also indicate that the feature is not available for the

disc.

San Disk

ZIO

Nikon

FUJIFILM

Lexar

San Disk

PNY

SAMSUNG

Sony

RCA

SDDR-89

CM-28100

HO97949

COOLPIX P2

FinePix A345

JDA1GB-275

SDCZ2-512-A10

PFD01GU20RF

YP-T7Z

NW-E507

RD2780

Equipment

Memory Card

Reader

Digital Camera

USB Memory

MP3 Player

ModelsBrand

Introduction

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................................2

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS ..........................3

Power source ...................................................5

Precautions ......................................................6

Notes and Informations .................................... 7

Contents. .......................................................... 9

Identification of controls ................................. 10

Multi brand remote control ............................. 14

Antenna connections...................................... 16

Cable TV connections .................................... 18

Connecting to a TV ........................................ 20

Connecting to an audio equipment ................ 24

Connecting to a USB Mass Storage .............. 26

Introduction

Recording a TV program ................................ 39

One-touch Timer Recording (OTR) ................ 41

Timer recording .............................................. 42

Recording (VCR)

Stereo recording and playback ...................... 44

Second Audio Program (SAP)........................ 44

Duplicating a video tape ................................. 45

Recording a DVD/CD disc.............................. 46

Other functions (VCR)

Loading and unloading a cassette tape ......... 34

Cassette tape playback .................................. 35

Special playback ............................................ 36

Convenience function..................................... 37

Playback (VCR)

Setting the video channel ............................... 27

Setting the language ...................................... 28

Clock setting................................................... 29

Tuner setting .................................................. 32

Basic setup (VCR)

Playing a disc ................................................. 47

Basic playback (DVD)

Advanced playback (DVD)

Zooming ......................................................... 50

Locating desired scene .................................. 50

Marking desired scenes ................................. 51

Repeat playback ............................................ 52

A-B Repeat playback ..................................... 52

Program playback .......................................... 53

Random playback .......................................... 53

Changing angles ............................................ 54

Title selection ................................................. 54

DVD menu...................................................... 54

Changing soundtrack language ..................... 55

Setting surround sound .................................. 55

Subtitles ......................................................... 56

To turn off the PBC ......................................... 56

MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD

operation ........................................................ 57

Language code list ......................................... 71

Troubleshooting ............................................. 72

Specifications ................................................. 73

Canadian warranty information ...................... 74

Others

Contents

Connections

Function setup (DVD)

Customizing the function settings .................. 63

Temporary disabling of rating level by

DVD disc ........................................................ 70

Introduction

Identification of controls

See the page in for details.

Front panel

ON/STANDBY button

AUDIO (L/R)/VIDEO IN

(LINE IN 2) jacks

EJECT

button

Disc tray

Display window

REC button

CHANNEL / buttons

OPEN/CLOSE button

Remote sensor

VCR mode indicator

DVD mode indicator

Cassette loading slot

VCR/DVD mode selector

button

STOP button

PLAY button REV button

FWD button

USB Port

Rear panel

DVD S-VIDEO OUT jack

DVD AUDIO (L/R)

OUT jacks

DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack

DVD COMPONENT

OUT jacks

ANT OUT jack

ANT IN jack

AUDIO (L/R)/VIDEO

IN (LINE IN1) jacks

DVD/VCR common AUDIO

(L/R)/VIDEO OUT jacks

AC power cord

HDMI OUT jack

DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT jack

When connecting the optical digital cable, remove

the cap and fit the connector into the jack firmly.

When not using the jack, keep the cap inserted

to protect it from dust intrusion.

Introduction

VCR operation status

CH 125

8 : 47

MON

00 : 00 : 00 SP

STEREO SAP

While watching TV

DAY OF THE WEEK

CHANNEL

TAPE SPEED

REAL TIME COUNTER

CLOCK

STEREO AND

SECOND

AUDIO

PROGRAM

(SAP)

8 : 30

MON

00 : 15 : 12 SP

HI-FI

STEREO

While operating a tape

OPERATING

MODE

TAPE IN

AUTO REPEAT

HI-FI STEREO

Disc operation status

Press CALL to display VCR operation status on the screen.

To cancel the display, press CALL again.

Recording :

Rec/Pause

Play :

Stop :

Eject :

VCR Icons

Press DISPLAY, the status display of the disc will appear on the screen as follows.

To cancel the display, press DISPLAY again.

VCD

CHAPTER

NO.

OUTPUT SELECTION

Timer Recording indicator (VCR)

Multifunctional indicator

Recording

indicator

(VCR)

Track indicator (CD)

Tape loaded indicator (VCR)

Play indicator

VCR indicator (VCR) Still indicator DVD disc inserted indicator

CD inserted

indicator

AM/PM indicator

(AM is not displayed)

Progressive indicator

Display window

DVD 00:15:25 01:41:39

Title 1/3 Chapter 2/24

1/1 Eng Dolby Digital 1/2 Eng

1/1

ELAPSED

TIME

ANGLE NO.

DISC OPERATION

TITLE NO.

TOTAL

TIME

AUDIO LANGUAGE

DVD

A KIND OF AUDIO

SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

VCD 00:08:32 00:51:03

Track 3/15

DISC OPERATION

TRACK NO.

ELAPSED

TIME

TOTAL

TIME

Introduction

Identification of controls (Continued)

Remote control

DVD MENU button

Use the MENU button to display the menu included on

many DVD video discs. To operate a menu, follow the

instructions in “DVD Menu.”

The instructions in this manual describe the functions on the remote control. See the page in for details.

*TV control buttons

The various brands of TV listed on page 14 can be operated

with this remote control. There may be some TV models that

cannot be operated with this remote control. If this is the case,

use the original remote control supplied with the TV.

•CABLE BOX control buttons

The various brands of CABLE BOX listed on page 15 can

be operated with this remote control. There may be some

CABLE BOX models that cannot be operated with this

remote control. If this is the case, use the original remote

control supplied with the CABLE BOX.

FWD

USB

DVD

DVD/VCR button

* TV button

CALL button

* DISPLAY button

ZERO RETURN button

JUMP button

CM SKIP button

ZOOM button

CANCEL button

CLEAR button

VCR MENU button

SETUP button

COUNTER RESET button

5954

ATR button

SUBTITLE button

SP/SLP button

PLAYMODE button

DVD/USB button

A-B RPT button

TOP MENU button

5954

PLAY button

4735

PAUSE/STILL button

4836

REV button

4935

Direction buttons

SET+/

buttons

CH+/

buttons

///

()

* POWER button

* 100 button

* VOL +/

buttons

* INPUT SELECT button

PROGRAM button

RETURN button

63 70

STOP button

4735

HDMI button

DVD/VCR SELECT button

27 47

TV/VCR button

REC/OTR button

TIMER REC button

SLOW button

4936

CLOCK/COUNTER button

FWD button

SKIP button

VISS + button

AUDIO SELECT button

AUDIO button

DVD MENU button

54 59

* ENTER button

28 63

SKIP button

CABLE BOX button

* Direct channel selection

buttons (0-9)

Number buttons (0-9)

* CH / button

VISS

button

MARKER button

EJECT button (VCR)

OPEN/CLOSE (DVD)

ANGLE button

Introduction

Operation

• Aim the remote control at the remote sensor and press control buttons to

operate.

• Operate the remote control within 30° angle on either side of the remote

sensor, up to a distance of approx. 7 meters.

Replace the compartment

cover.

Install two “AAA” batteries

(supplied),

paying attention to the

polarity diagram in the battery

compartment.

Open the battery compart-

ment cover in the direction of

the arrow.

Approx. 7 meters

Caution:

Never throw batteries into a fire.

Notes:

• Be sure to use AAA size batteries.

• Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.

•

Batteries should always be disposed of with the environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in accordance with

applicable laws and regulations.

• If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if the operating range becomes reduced, replace batteries with

new ones.

• When necessary to replace batteries in the remote control, always replace both batteries with new ones. Never mix

battery types or use new and used batteries in combination.

• Always remove batteries from remote control if they are dead or if the remote control is not to be used for an

extended period of time. This will prevent battery acid from leaking into the battery compartment.

• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.

• Press POWER to turn the DVD/VCR on or off.

• Select your desired operating mode (DVD or VCR) using DVD/VCR SELECT.

(DVD or VCR indicator on the front panel will show you which mode is selected.)

• Press CH + or CH – to move through the channels one channel at a time.

• The / / / are also used to navigate on-screen menu system.

• You can directly access specific channels using Direct channel selection buttons (0–9).

• Each press of DVD/VCR SELECT on the remote control, switches the screen between the VCR screen (VCR mode)

and the DVD screen (DVD mode).

12 3

Remote control basics

Inserting batteries

Introduction

Multi brand remote control

This remote control can be compatible with various brands of TV/

Cable box/DSS® satellite receiver by setting their control codes. The

TOSHIBA code has initially been set to control TOSHIBA TVs.

Setting TV control codes Table of TV brand codes

Brand name Brand Code

of your TV

Toshiba 01

Bell & Howell 09

Carver 10

Celebrity 03

Citizen 12

Curtis Mathes 09, 12

Dumont 14

Electro band 03

Emerson 09,11

Fisher 09

GE 02, 07, 11

Gibralter 14

Goldstar 11

Hallmark 11

Hitachi 06

Infinity 10

JBL 10

JCB 03

JVC 05

LXI

01, 02, 09, 10, 11

Magnavox 10

Marantz 10

Megatron 06, 11

Memorex 04, 09, 11

MGA 04, 11

Midland 02,07, 14

Mitsubishi 04, 11

Motorola 08

MTC 12

NAD 01, 11

Nikko 11

Optimus 09

Optonica 08

Panasonic 07, 10, 15

Press TV to set the remote control operating

your TV.

Important

Some TV’s may not respond to all the operations above,

or may not be operated at all with this remote control. In

this case, operate your TV with its own remote control.

Notes:

• For some brands, several control codes (brand codes) are al-

located. Try each of them until the buttons work on your TV.

• If you replace the remote control’s batteries, set the brand code

again.

While holding down PROGRAM, enter the two

digits of your TV's brand code (listed on the

right) using Number buttons (0–9), then release

PROGRAM.

Point the remote control at your TV and use each button

listed below to make sure that your TV is operated

correctly.

POWER To turn the TV on or off.

CH MM

M/??

?To select TV channels in the upper

or lower direction.

VOL +/– To adjust the sound level.

INPUT SELECT To select an external source such

as a VCR.

To select TV channels. When select-

ing channels 1 to 9, first enter 0 and

then desired number.

100 To substitute for 100 channel key.

DISPLAY To turn TV’s screen display on or

off.

ENTER To use for the TV’s ENTER key.

Direct channel

selection buttons

(0-9)

Brand name Brand Code

of your TV

Penney

01, 02, 07, 11, 12

Philco 10

Philips 10

Pioneer 16

Princeclub 12

Prism 07

Proscan 02

Proton 11

Pulser 14

Quasar 07, 15

Radio Shack 13

RCA 02

Realistic 09, 11, 13

Runco(NEC) 14

Samsung 11, 12

Sanyo 09

Scotch 11

Scott 11

Sears

01, 02, 09, 10, 11

Sharp 08, 13

Sony 03

Soundesign 11

Supreme 03

Sylvania 10

Tandy 08

Technics 07, 15

Techwood 07

Teknika 04,10,12

TMK 11

Victor 05

Vidikron 10

Vidtech 11

Wards 10, 11,13

Zenith 14

ENTER

PROGRAM

POWER

CH MM

M/??

0–9

100

INPUT SELECT

VOL +/–

DISPLAY

Introduction

Table of Cable box brand codes

Setting Cable box/DSS® satellite

receiver control codes

Press CABLE BOX to set the remote control

operating your Cable box/DSS

satellite receiver.

Important

Some

Cable box/DSS

satellite receiver

may not respond

to all the operations above, or may not be operated at all

with this remote control. In this case, operate them with

its own remote control.

Notes:

• For some brands, several control codes (brand codes) are al-

located. Try each of them until the buttons work on your

Cable

box/DSS

satellite receiver

• If you replace the remote control’s batteries, set the brand code

again.

While holding down PROGRAM, enter the two

digits of your Cable box/DSS® satellite receiver

brand code (listed on the right) using Number

buttons (0–9), then release PROGRAM.

Point the remote control at your Cable box/DSS®

satellite receiver and use each button listed below to

make sure that your

Cable box/DSS

satellite receiver

is operated correctly.

POWER To turn the Cable box/DSS® satel-

lite receiver on or off.

CH MM

M/??

?To select cable/satellite channels in

the upper or lower direction. (Not

applicable to some brands of cable

box/satellite receiver.)

Number buttons (0–9)

To select desired channels to record.

ENTER

To use for the Cable box’s ENTER key.

(Some cable boxes require you to use 100 button as the

enter button.)

Brand name of Brand Code

your cable box

Toshiba 36

Anvision 13, 20, 21,

22, 23, 24,

25, 26, 58,

62, 84

Archer 1, 20, 21,

29, 42, 44,

63, 88, 91

Cablestar 13, 20, 21,

22, 23, 24,

25, 26, 58,

62, 84

Cableview 30, 42, 44,

52, 63, 88

Citizen 30, 42, 44,

52, 63, 88

Curtis 8, 9, 56, 61

Diamond 1, 20, 21,

29, 42, 44,

63, 88, 91

Eagle 13, 20, 21,

22, 23, 24,

25, 26, 58,

62, 84

Eastern 26, 28

GC Brand 30, 42, 44,

52, 63, 88

Gemini 4, 30, 85

General 1, 2, 3,

4, 31, 34,

55, 83, 85,

Hamlin 14, 15, 28,

Hitachi 31, 79, 80

Jerrold 1, 2, 3,

4, 31, 34,

55, 85, 91

Macom 31, 79, 80

Magnavox 13, 20, 21,

22, 23, 24,

25, 26, 58,

62, 84

Movietime 29, 32, 38,

39, 42, 44,

NSC 29, 32, 38,

39, 42, 44,

OAK 10, 11, 12,

13, 46

OAK Sigma 10, 11, 12,

13, 46

Panasonic 6, 8, 16, 17

Brand name of Brand Code

your cable box

Philips 4, 13, 20,

21, 22, 23,

24, 25, 26,

58, 62, 84

Pioneer 5, 6, 78

Pulsar 30, 42, 44,

52, 63, 88

Randtek 13, 20, 21,

22, 23, 24,

25, 26, 58,

62, 84

RCA 6, 8, 16, 17

Realistic 44, 88

Regal 14, 23, 41,

Regency 26, 28

Rembrandt 29, 32, 38,

39, 42, 44,

Samsung 4, 6, 32,

42, 78

Scientific Atlanta

8, 9, 56, 61

Sheritech 27

SL Mark 4, 6, 32,

42, 78

Sprucher 6, 8, 16, 17

Stargate 4, 6, 30, 32,

42, 44, 52,

63, 78, 88

Sylvania 19

Teknika 74

Telecaption 77

Teleview 4, 6, 32,

42, 78

Texscan 18, 19

Tocom 1, 33, 34,

42, 48, 49,

73, 91

Unica 1, 20, 21,

29, 42, 44,

63, 88, 91

Universal 29, 42, 43,

44, 52, 63,

82, 88

Videoway 7, 23, 45,

50, 84

Viewstar 13, 20, 21,

22, 23, 24,

25, 26, 58,

62, 84

Warner Amex

Zenith 7, 23, 45,

50, 84

Instrument

Brand name Brand code

Toshiba 99

RCA 98

Sony 97

Magnavox 95, 96

Brand name Brand code

Draker 94

Primestar 93

Hitachi 92, 89

Panasonic 90

Table of DSS

satellite receiver brand codes

Connections

Notes: •A clear picture will not be obtained by the DVD/VCR unless the antenna signal is good. Connect the antenna to the

DVD/VCR properly.

•For better quality recording, an indoor antenna or a telescopic antenna is not recommended. The use of an outdoor

type antenna is required.

•If you are not sure about the connection, please refer to qualified service personnel.

The DVD/VCR must be connected “between” the antenna and the TV. First, disconnect the antenna from the TV and

connect it to the DVD/VCR. Then connect the DVD/VCR to the TV. Below are 3 common methods of connecting an

antenna system to a DVD/VCR. Find the type of antenna system you are using and follow the connection diagram.

If both VHF and UHF antennas have 300 ohm twin lead (flat) wires, use a combiner having two 300 ohm inputs and

one 75 ohm output.

Note:

Combination VHF/UHF Antenna with 75 ohm Coaxial Cable

Combination VHF/UHF Antenna with 300 ohm Twin Lead (Flat) Wire

Separate VHF and UHF Antennas

DVD/VCR

VHF UHF

300 ohm Twin Lead (Flat) Wire

(not supplied)

Matching Transformer 300 ohm Input 75

ohm output (not supplied)

300 ohm Twin Lead (Flat) Wire

(not supplied)

75 ohm Coaxial Cable

Combiner 75/300 ohm Inputs 75 ohm output

(not supplied)

DVD/VCR

Antenna connections

If you are using an antenna system, follow these instructions. If you are a Cable TV subscriber, skip ahead to page

for the proper connections.

Antenna to DVD/VCR connection

Connections

UHF

VHF

UHF

VHF

VHF/UHF IN

Note: If a VHF or UHF antenna is used,

set the TV/CABLE menu option to

the “TV” mode.

Note: If a VHF or UHF antenna is used,

set the TV/CABLE menu option

to the “TV” mode.

Note: If a VHF or UHF antenna is used,

set the TV/CABLE menu option to

the “TV” mode.

75 ohm Coaxial Cable (supplied)

Splitter 75 ohm Input

75/300 ohm outputs

(not supplied)

Splitter 75 ohm Input

300 ohm outputs

(not supplied)

TV with single 75 ohm VHF/UHF antenna

input

TV with 300 ohm UHF and 75 ohm VHF

antenna inputs

TV with 300 ohm UHF and 300 ohm VHF

antenna inputs

After you have connected the antenna to the DVD/VCR, you must connect the DVD/VCR to the TV.

Below are 3 common methods of connecting your DVD/VCR to a TV. Find the type of TV you are using and follow the

connection diagram.

This DVD/VCR has a single 75 ohm output for connection to a TV. If your TV has separate VHF and UHF antenna

inputs (numbers 2 and 3 below), use a splitter to connect the DVD/VCR to the TV for VHF and UHF reception.

75 ohm Coaxial Cable

(supplied)

75 ohm Coaxial Cable

(supplied)

DVD/VCR to TV connection

Connections

Cable TV connections

VHF/UHF

IN (ANT)

VHF/UHF

IN (ANT)

VHF/UHF

IN (ANT)

Many cable companies offer services permitting reception of extra channels including pay or subscription channels. This

DVD/VCR has an extended tuning range and can be tuned to most cable channels without using a cable company

supplied converter box, except for those premium channels which are intentionally scrambled. If you subscribe to a

premium channel which is scrambled, you must have a descrambler box for proper reception.

Allows: *Recording of nonscrambled channels.

*Use of the programmable timer.

*Recording of one channel while watching another.

Allows: *Recording of channels through the converter box

(scrambled and unscrambled).

*Using the programmable timer to record only the

channel selected at the converter box.

Prevents: *Recording one channel while watching another.

*Using the DVD/VCR tuner to select channels.

DVD/VCR

Incoming Cable

Converter/

Descrambler

Incoming

Cable

Note:

To record from converter/descrambler, DVD/

VCR tuner must be tuned to the converter

output channel, usually channel 3 or 4.

DVD/VCR

Note: Whenever a Converter/Descrambler box is placed before the DVD/VCR, you must tune the DVD/VCR to the output of

the Converter/Descrambler box, usually channel 3 or 4.

Incoming Cable

Converter/Descrambler

Allows: *Recording of nonscrambled channels.

*Use of the programmable timer.

*Recording an unscrambled channel while watching

any channel selected at the converter box.

Prevents: Recording scrambled channels.

Note:

If you are playing a tape or using the tuner

built into the DVD/VCR, the converter must

be set to the video channel output of the DVD/

VCR (either 3 or 4).

Connections

VHF/UHF

IN (ANT)

VHF/UHF

IN (ANT)

This DVD/VCR cannot receive scrambled programs since it does not contain a descrambler. In order to receive scram-

bled programs, your existing descrambler must be used. Descrambler boxes are available from cable companies. Con-

sult your local cable company for more information concerning connection to their descrambler equipment. There are

many ways to connect your DVD/VCR to a cable system. Below are six common methods of connection.

IMPORTANT: Make sure the TV/CABLE menu option is set to the “CABLE” mode.

Incoming Cable

Allows: *Recording of one channel while watching another.

*Using the programmable timer to record only the channel selected at the converter box.

*Recording of all channels through the converter box.

Prevents: *Watching scrambled channels while recording another channel.

*Using the DVD/VCR tuner to select channels.

DVD/VCR

Splitter

Converter/Descrambler

DVD/VCR

Converter/Descrambler A/B Switch

Incoming Cable

Splitter

Allows: *Recording of nonscrambled channels.

*Recording of one channel while watching another.

Watching premium channels through the converter while recording nonscrambled channels.

*Using the programmable timer.

Prevents: Recording scrambled channels.

DVD/VCR

Splitter

Converter/Descrambler

A/B Switch

VHF/UHF

IN (ANT)

Allows: *Recording of all channels through the converter box.

*Recording a scrambled or unscrambled channel while watching another (scrambled or

unscrambled) channel.

*Using the programmable timer to record only the channel selected at the converter box.

Prevents: Using the DVD/VCR tuner to select channels.

A/B Switch

Incoming Cable Converter/Descrambler

Connections

Connecting to a TV

Connect the DVD/VCR to your TV.

To VIDEO

OUT To ANALOG AUDIO OUT

(red) (white)

(yellow)

Signal flow

To wall outlet

To video input

(yellow) (red)

Audio/video cable (supplied)

To audio inputs

(white)

Notes:

• Refer to the owner’s manual of the connected TV as well.

• When you connect the DVD/VCR to your TV, be sure to turn off the power and unplug both units from the wall outlet before

making any connections.

• If your television set has one audio input, connect the left and right audio outputs of the DVD/VCR to a Y cable adapter

(not supplied) and then connect to your TV.

• Connect the DVD/VCR directly to your TV. If you connect the DVD/VCR to a VCR, TV/VCR combination or video selector,

the playback picture may be distorted as DVD video discs are copy protected.

• While HDMI is being output in the DVD mode, it is impossible to output from the Video out jack, S-video out jack or

Component video out jacks.

TV or monitor with

audio/video inputs

Basic connection

Note: This method transports VHS and DVD-video signals. For enhanced DVD-video performance, we recommend you to

connect the S-video or ColorStream® component video outputs to your TV/monitor also.

• Make sure following setting.

On-screen display Select: Page

“Digital Out” “PCM” or “Bitstream”

Connections

Notes:

• Refer to the owner’s manual of the connected equipment as well.

• When you connect the DVD/VCR to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from

the wall outlet before making any connections.

• If you place the DVD/VCR near a tuner or radio, the radio broadcast sound might be distorted. In this case, place the DVD/

VCR away from the tuner and radio.

• The output sound of the DVD/VCR has a wide dynamic range. Be sure to adjust the receiver’s volume to a moderate

listening level. Otherwise, the speakers may be damaged by a sudden high volume sound.

• Turn off the amplifier before you connect or disconnect the DVD/VCR’s power cord. If you leave the amplifier power on, the

speakers may be damaged.

• While HDMI is being output in the DVD mode, it is impossible to output from the Video out jack, S-video out jack or

Component video out jacks.

•When connecting to a TV using the S-video jack, make sure that the Progressive indicator “” on the display

window is not lit. If it is lit, the S-video outputs do not feed the correct signals and you cannot see any picture. To

turn off the Progressive indicator, select Interlaced output

Connecting to an audio system and TV equipped with S-video input/component video inputs

• Actual

labels for

component

video inputs

may vary

depending

on the TV

manufac-

turer (ex. Y,

R-Y, B-Y or

Y, C B, CR).

TV or monitor with

component video inputs

video input

To P

VIDEO

OUT

Signal flow

To wall outlet

To audio inputs of

the amplifier

(red)

(white)

(red) (white)

To Y

VIDEO

OUT

To P

VIDEO

OUT

To Y video input

video input

Audio system

To ANALOG

AUDIO OUT

To S-VIDEO

OUT

Component

video cable

(not supplied)

To S-video input

S-video cable

(not supplied) Audio cable (not supplied)

If you connect the DVD/VCR to

your TV with the DVD OUT jacks,

select the corresponding video

input on your television to watch

DVD video discs.

The S-video output and component video output transports the DVD-video signal exclusively and will deliver enhanced DVD

video picture performance.

S-video output

An S-Video connection is superior to Video (Yellow) output. Use this method for DVD playback when the connected television has S-

Video input, and does not have component video inputs.

Component video outputs

PROGRESSIVE outputs

Some TVs or monitors are equipped with component video inputs that are capable of reproducing a progressively scanned video

signal. Connecting to these inputs allows you to view the highest quality pictures with less flicker.

INTERLACED outputs

Some TVs or monitors are equipped with component video inputs. Connecting to these inputs allows you to enjoy the highest quality

DVD picture playback.

Notes:

• To switch the scan mode between the interlace and progressive modes, see page

• In some TVs or monitors, the color levels of the playback picture may be reduced slightly or the tint may change. In such a case,

adjust the TV or monitor for optimum performance.

• Make sure following setting.

On-screen display Select: Page

“Digital Out” “PCM” or “Bitstream”

Connections

About HDMI

HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports both video

and audio on a single digital connection for use with DVD players,

DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed

to provide the technologies of High Bandwidth Digital Content

Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface (DVI) in one

specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content transmitted

and received by DVI-compliant or HDMI-compliant displays.

HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-

definition video plus standard to multi-channel surround-sound

audio. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a

bandwidth of up to 2.2 gigabytes per second (with HDTV signals),

one connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and

communication between the AV source and AV devices such as

DTVs.

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are

trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC.

Connecting to a display (Using the HDMI cable)

Signal flow

HDMI Cable (not supplied)

HDMI-compatible display

To HDMI input

To HDMI OUT

To wall outlet

Connecting to a TV (Continued)

Switching the video quality (HDMI mode) using HDMI

button on the remote control

Press HDMI on the remote control to receive a suitable

video quality. The video quality is required to match

your TV having HDMI feature and suitable quality.

Please also check your TV owner's manual.

Press HDMI to change the video quality as follows:

On-screen display Select: Page

“Digital Out” “PCM”

• Make sure following setting.

Notes:

It is only possible to switch the HDMI output in the following below cases unless only an Audio/Video Cable/S-video cable/

Component Video Cables is connected.

* When in DVD Mode (in DISC/USB Mode)

* When the disc is in Stop or Resume mode

* When the Setup Menu is not being displayed

* When the HDMI Cable is connected

HDMI: Off

NTSC: 480p (Progressive)

NTSC: 720p (Progressive)

NTSC: 1080i (Interlace)

HDMI: cannot output

Component/Composite/S-Video: outputting

(Output setup is set to Progressive : cannot output S-Video)

HDMI: outputting

Component/Composite/S-Video: cannot output

For proper operation, it is recommended

that you use as short an HDMI cable as

possible.

Connections

USER setting/operation Content of output for each output jack

Mode

VCR/DVD

HDMI

Output

*1 HDMI

Output

Setting Video S-Video Component RF

Modulator

VCR VCR VCR

DVD

DVD 480p (DVD)

480i (DVD)

480p (DVD)

480i (DVD)

DVD

Off Interlace

Progressive

Interlace

Progressive

Interlace

Progressive

Interlace

Progressive

480p

720p

1080i

480p

720p

Off

1080i

480p (DVD)

720p (DVD)

1080i (DVD)

480p (DVD)

720p (DVD)

1080i (DVD)

480p (DVD)

720p (DVD)

1080i (DVD)

480p (DVD)

720p (DVD)

1080i (DVD)

480p

720p

1080i

480p

720p

1080i

Notes:

• When in DVD Mode/outputting HDMI signal, it is impossible to output any video images from either the Video out jack/S-Video

out jack/Component out jacks.

If the viewer would like to view videos using the Video out jack/S-Video out jack/Component out jacks, then the HDMI output must

set to “Off” by pressing the HDMI button on the remote control.

• When the HDMI Cable is connected, if the HDMI is pressed or the VCR Mode is switched to DVD Mode, there is a possibility that

the monitor will not show any output images. In this case, turn off the HDMI mode.

Deactivate HDMI output with HDMI (For details, please refer to “Switching the video quality (HDMI mode) using HDMI

button on the remote control” ).

• Refer to the Owner’s manual of the connected TV as well.

• When connecting the DVD/VCR to your TV, be sure to turn off the power and unplug both units from the wall outlet before making any

connections.

• If you have an HDMI (with HDCP) equipped monitor or display, you can connect it to the DVD/VCR using the HDMI cable.

• The HDMI connector outputs uncompressed digital video as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the DVD/VCR is compatible

with, including DVD-Video, Video CD, Audio CD and MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® files.

• No sound will be output from the HDMI cable if the “Digital Out” is not set to “PCM” .

3Picture Output

• DVD Mode

The following refers to instructions for Picture Output in DVD Mode.

There is no Analog Output (*2) for HDMI output.

When HDMI output setting is “Off”, there is no HDMI output.

*2: Output from Video out jack/S-Video out jack/Component out jacks

• VCR Mode

The following refers to instructions for Picture Output in VCR mode.

This set outputs the picture from the Video out jack in VCR mode. However, please see the following instructions for HDMI out

jack/S-Video out jack/Component out jacks.

DVD picture is always output from HDMI out jack during HDMI Output, but it cannot output from S-Video out jack/Component out

jacks during HDMI Output.

When the HDMI output setting is “Off”, this set outputs picture signals as follows according to the HDMI Setting in the Setup

Menu. When HDMI Output setting is “Off”, HDMI output does not function.

When the Output setting is “Interlace”: Picture from VCR is output from the Video out jack

Picture from the DVD is output from the S-Video out jack/Component out jacks

When Output setting is “Progressive”: Picture from VCR is output from the Video out jack

NO OUTPUT from the S-Video out jack

Picture from the DVD is output from the Component out jacks

The content of the output for each output jack are as shown in the following table and differ depending on User settings/operation.

*1: Settings for HDMI output format are performed using the “HDMI” key on the remote control.

Connections

Connecting to an audio equipment

You can enjoy high quality dynamic sounds of DVD video discs or

audio CDs by connecting the DVD/VCR to optional audio

equipment.

For connection to your TV, see “Connecting to a TV”

: Front speaker

: Rear speaker

: Sub woofer

: Center speaker

: Signal flow

Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a Dolby® Digital decoder

Connecting to an amplifier equipped with Dolby Surround Pro Logic

Dolby Surround Pro Logic

You can enjoy the dynamic realistic sound of Dolby Surround Pro Logic by connecting an amplifier and speaker system (right and left

front speakers, a center speaker, and one or two rear speakers).

Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a DTS decoder

Digital Theater Systems (DTS)

DTS is a high quality surround technology used in theaters and now available for home use,

on DVD video discs or audio CDs.

If you have a DTS decoder or processor, you can obtain the full

benefit of 5.1 channel DTS encoded sound tracks on DVD

video discs or audio CDs.

Manufactured under license from

Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro

Logic” and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

• Use DVD video discs

encoded via the Dolby Digital

recording system.

• Make sure following setting.

• Use DVD video discs or

audio CDs encoded via the

DTS recording system.

• Make sure following setting.

* Connect one or two rear speakers.

The output sound from the rear

speakers will be monaural even if you

connect two rear speakers.

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are

trademarks of Digital Theater Systems,

Inc.

Amplifier equipped with a

Dolby Digital decoder

75 1 coaxial cable (not supplied)

To COAXIAL

type digital

audio input

Amplifier equipped with a

DTS decoder

To COAXIAL

type digital

audio input

• This selection uses the following reference mark.

To ANALOG

AUDIO OUT

To audio input

Audio cable (not supplied)

75 1 coaxial cable (not supplied)

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is the surround sound technology used in theaters showing the latest movies, and is

now available to reproduce this realistic effect in the home. You can enjoy motion picture and live

concert DVD video discs encoded via the Dolby Digital recording system with this dynamic realistic

sound by connecting the DVD/VCR to a 6 channel amplifier equipped with a Dolby Digital decoder

or Dolby Digital processor. If you have a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, you will obtain the full

benefit of Pro Logic from the same DVD movies that provide full 5.1-channel Dolby Digital soundtracks,

as well as from titles with the Dolby Surround mark.

Amplifier equipped with

Dolby Surround Pro Logic

With an amplifier equipped with Dolby Digital

Connect the equipment the same way as described in “Connecting to an amplifier

equipped with a Dolby Digital decoder.” Refer to that amplifier’s owner’s manual and set

the amplifier so that you can enjoy Dolby Surround Pro Logic sound.

With an amplifier not equipped with Dolby Digital

Connect the equipment as follows.

• This connection is only suitable for Video CDs and

Audio CDs.

Connect either

On-screen display Select: Page

“Digital Out” “PCM” or

“Bitstream”

Optical cable (not supplied)

To OPTICAL

type digital

audio input

On-screen display Select: Page

“Digital Out” “PCM” or

“Bitstream”

• Make sure following setting.

Optical cable (not supplied)

To OPTICAL

type digital

audio input

On-screen display Select: Page

“Digital Out” “Bitstream”

Connections

75 1 coaxial cable (not supplied)

Warning

When playing DTS-encoded discs (DVD video discs and audio CDs), excessive noise may be output from the analog stereo

jacks. To avoid possible damage to the audio system, you should take proper precautions when the ANALOG AUDIO OUT (L/

R) jacks of the DVD/VCR are connected to an amplification system. (Do not leave the ANALOG AUDIO OUT (L/R) wires

dangling.) To enjoy DTS Digital Surround™ playback, an external 5.1 channel DTS Digital Surround™ decoder system must

be connected to the OPTICAL or COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the DVD/VCR.

Connecting to an amplifier equipped with an MPEG2 audio decoder

MPEG2 sound

You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs encoded via the MPEG2 recording system with dynamic realistic sound

by connecting an amplifier equipped with an MPEG2 audio decoder or MPEG2 audio processor.

Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a digital audio input

2 channel digital stereo

You can enjoy the dynamic sound of 2 channel digital stereo by connecting an amplifier equipped with a digital audio input and speaker

system (right and left front speakers).

Notes:

• DO NOT connect the OPTICAL or COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the DVD/VCR to the AC-3 RF input of a Dolby

Digital Receiver. This input on your A/V Receiver is reserved for Laserdisc use only and is incompatible with the OPTICAL or

COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the DVD/VCR.

• Connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the DVD/VCR to the “OPTICAL” input of a Receiver or Processor.

• Connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the DVD/VCR to the “COAXIAL” input of a Receiver or Processor.

• Refer to the owner’s manual of the connected equipment as well.

• When you connect the DVD/VCR to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the

wall outlet before making any connections.

• The output sound of the DVD/VCR has a wide dynamic range. Be sure to adjust the receiver’s volume to a moderate

listening level. Otherwise, the speakers and your hearing may be damaged by a sudden high volume sound.

• Turn off the amplifier before you connect or disconnect the DVD/VCR’s power cord. If you leave the amplifier’s power on, the

speakers may be damaged.

• Use DVD video discs

encoded via the MPEG2

recording system.

• Make sure following setting.

Amplifier equipped with an

MPEG2 audio decoder

To COAXIAL

type digital

audio input

Amplifier equipped with a

digital audio input

To COAXIAL

type digital

audio input

Connect either

Optical cable (not supplied)

To OPTICAL

type digital

audio input

On-screen display Select: Page

“Digital Out” “PCM” or

“Bitstream”

Optical cable (not supplied)

To OPTICAL

type digital

audio input

• Make sure following setting.

On-screen display Select: Page

“Digital Out” “PCM” or

“Bitstream”

Connections

Connecting to a USB Mass Storage

Signal flow

To USB port

USB Cable (not supplied)

USB Mass Storage

Connecting to a USB Mass Storage

Notes:

In order to avoid damage to the unit, the USB Mass Storage, the Memory Card, etc, the following instructions should

be observed.

• Insert the USB cable properly taking care to observe the correct port direction.

• Make sure the unit is off or is set to DISC mode when disconnecting the USB Mass Storage from the unit.

• In order to avoid damage to recorded data, do not plug in or unplug the unit, no matter whether the USB Mass

Storage is On or Off, including Resume Stop mode.

• In order to avoid damage to recorded data, do not disconnect the USB Mass Storage from the port, no matter

whether the USB Mass Storage is On or Off, including Resume Stop mode.

• Before removing the Memory Card while a Memory Card Reader or Digital Camera is connected to the unit, ensure

that the power is off or that the unit is in DISC mode .

• Do not remove the Memory Card from the Memory Card Reader or Digital Camera no matter whether the Memory

Card is On or Off, including Resume Stop mode.

• In order to avoid damage to recorded data, do not plug in or unplug the unit, no matter whether the Memory Card

is inserted or not inserted into the Memory Card Reader or Digital Camera, including Resume Stop mode.

• In order to understand the correct operation and handling of the USB Mass Storage, read the USB Mass Storage

instructions carefully.

• As it cannot be guaranteed that recorded data will not be damaged while using this unit, it is recommended to

make back-up data.

• Avoid connecting any other USB connectable device that uses electricity from the USB connector such as a Printer

or Keyboard when the USB Mass Storage is connected.

• It is impossible to connect several devices by using a USB HUB.

This unit can be used to read JPEG, WMA, MP3 and DivX® data for any memory card reader/writer or digital camera that

accepts USB Mass Storage Class.

For devices that are compatible with the unit’s USB port, please refer to page

Basic setup (VCR)

Setting the video channel

When a TV is connected with the 75 ohm coaxial cable only.

To view playback of a recorded tape or DVD disc, or to watch a

program selected by the VCR's channel selector, the TV must be set to

channel 3 or 4 (video channel).

Setting the video channel

Press POWER on the remote control or ON/

STANDBY on the unit to turn on the DVD/VCR.

Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.

Turn ON the TV and set to CH 3 or 4 to corre-

spond with the channel selected in step 2.

Press TV/VCR to select the VCR position.

Select any channel to receive a TV station in

your area.

The channel number will appear on the screen

for about 4 seconds.

The VCR indicator on the

front panel will light.

The VCR indicator will

appear in the display

window.

For a push-button TV tuner

If CH 3 or 4 corresponding to the video channel cannot

be tuned on your TV, proceed as follows: set the VCR

3/4 channel selector and the TV to CH 3 or 4, playback

a prerecorded tape and tune the TV to receive a sharp

color picture from the video cassette recorder. Refer to

your TV owner's manual for details.

Note:

If the unit does not operate properly, or No key operation

(by the unit and/or the remote control): Static electricity, etc.,

may affect the player's operation. Disconnect the AC power cord

once, then connect it again.

POWER

DVD/VCR SELECT

DVD/VCR

Press and hold 3 or 4 on the remote for 3

seconds in standby mode.

The video channel will

start to flash for 3

seconds in the display

window.

1Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.

TV/VCR

Basic setup (VCR)

Press SET + or – to select “LANGUAGE”, then

press ENTER.

Press VCR MENU.

The VCR menu screen will appear.

Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM

SETUP”, then press ENTER.

If you use the unit for the first time,

press VCR MENU, instead of the

“SYSTEM SETUP” menu screen of

the main screen in step 2 may appear.

Setting the language

You can choose from three different languages (English,

French and Spanish) for the on-screen display.

Press SET + or – to select the desired language:

English (ENGLISH), Spanish (ESPAÑOL) or

French (FRANCAIS), then press ENTER.

Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is

cleared.

〈 〉

〈〉

〈 〉

Notes:

• Both the VCR and the DVD have their own player menus

• If no buttons are pressed for more than 60 seconds, the VCR

MENU screen will return to normal TV-operation automatically.

Preparation:

• Turn ON the TV and select to the corresponding

video input.

• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.

• Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.

(The VCR indicator will light.)

SET +/–

VCR MENU

DVD/VCR

ENTER

DVD/VCR SELECT

Basic setup (VCR)

Connect the Antenna or Cable system.

• If you use a cable box, turn it on.

Clock setting

The AUTO CLOCK function will automatically set the built-in clock

(Month, Day, Year and Time) when the DVD/VCR is connected to an

Antenna or Cable system and it is turned off. The DVD/VCR searches for

a station in your area containing the necessary AUTO CLOCK setting

signals. Once received, it will take approximately 4 minutes for the clock

to set itself automatically.

Preparation:

• Turn ON the TV and select the corresponding video input.

• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.

• Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.

(The VCR indicator will light.)

Plug the AC power cord to the AC outlet.

Make sure the DVD/VCR is turned off.

• Depending on the reception

condition it may take approx. thirty

minutes.

• If you press POWER, the Auto

Clock set is not programmed.

Wait at least three minutes and press POWER.

Press CALL to check the clock setting on

the on screen display.

If the clock is not set, check the antenna

condition. The AUTO CLOCK may not

function properly if the reception condition

is not good.

To set AUTO CLOCK to off

The auto clock adjustment will be updated at 6:00

AM, 12:00 PM and 6:00 PM everyday when the DVD/

VCR turned off.

• If you use a cable box and you want AUTO CLOCK

adjustment to be performed, the cable box must be

left on.

• The AUTO CLOCK adjustment is not effective when

there is a difference of more than 5 minutes exists

between the built-in clock time and the actual time.

When shipped from factory the AUTO CLOCK is set to “ON”.

But if you do not want AUTO CLOCK setting:

Press VCR MENU.

Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM SETUP”,

then press ENTER.

Press SET + or – to select “AUTO CLOCK”.

Press ENTER to select “OFF”.

Press VCR MENU repeatedly to return to the

normal screen.

• When the AUTO CLOCK is set to

“OFF”, the AUTO CLOCK adjustment

does not function. Set the clock

manually .

POWER

VCR MENU

ENTER

CALL

DVD/VCR

SET +/–

DVD/VCR SELECT

AUTO CLOCK setting

AUTO CLOCK adjustment

CH 125

8 : 47

MON

00 : 00 : 00 SP

STEREO SAP

Basic setup (VCR)

Press VCR MENU.

Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM SETUP”,

then press ENTER.

Press

SET + or –

to select “STANDARD TIME”

then press ENTER.

Press SET + or – to select your time zone,

then press ENTER.

Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is

cleared.

In the rare event that you live within broadcast range of two

stations in two different time zones, the DVD/VCR may recognize

the wrong station for the AUTO CLOCK setting.

To correct the situation:

Notes:

• To be able to select the standard time, the clock must first be

set by AUTO CLOCK once.

• If you live in Newfoundland and the AUTO CLOCK does not

function properly, set the AUTO CLOCK menu option to “OFF”

and set the clock manually.

Press VCR MENU.

Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM SETUP”,

then press ENTER.

Press SET + or – to select “DAYLIGHT

SAVING TIME”, then press ENTER.

Press SET + or – to select one of the

options, then press ENTER. Press VCR

MENU until the MENU screen is cleared.

Notes:

• When shipped from factory, the DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME is

set to “AUTO” position.

• When the clock is not set, DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME setting

is not available.

• When there is no DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME in your area, al-

ways select “OFF” position in step 3.

When you want to set the

DAYLIGHT

SAVING TIME

manually, on the first

Sunday in April you set to “ON”, and

on the last Sunday in October you set

to “OFF”.

ON:

OFF:

AUTO:

for manual setting

(forward one hour)

for manual setting

(back one hour)

for automatic setting

(read XDS in the signal)

〈〉

ATLANTIC : GMT–4hours

EASTERN : GMT–5hours

CENTRAL : GMT–6hours

MOUNTAIN : GMT–7hours

PACIFIC : GMT–8hours

ALASKA : GMT–9hours

HAWAII : GMT–10hours

AUTO : AUTO SET

(GMT: Greenwich Mean Time)

〈〉

To set DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME

You can set the DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME automatically or

manually.

To set STANDARD TIME

Clock setting (Continued)

Basic setup (VCR)

CANCEL

Press VCR MENU.

EXAMPLE: Setting the clock to “8:30 AM” October, 28

(SAT), 2006.

8 : 30

SAT

Manual clock setting

After setting the clock, date and time starts

functioning automatically.

Note:

After a power failure or disconnection of the power, the timer

settings will be lost. In this case, reset the present time.

To make corrections any time during the process

Press CANCEL repeatedly until the item you want to

change blinks, then press SET + or –.

Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM SETUP”,

then press ENTER.

Press SET + or – to select “CLOCK SET”,

then press ENTER.

Press SET + or – to set the month, then press

ENTER.

Set the day, year and time as in step 4.

〈 〉

If the AUTO CLOCK process did not set the date and time correctly, you

must set them manually for timer recording and DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME. VCR MENU

〈+/

–

/ENTER/CANCEL/MENU

〉

MONTH

DAY

YEAR

TIME

1 (SUN)

2006

12 : 00

〈 〉

ENTER

SET +/–

Basic setup (VCR)

Tuner setting

This DVD/VCR is equipped with a channel memory feature which allows

channels to skip up or down to the next channel set into memory,

skipping over unwanted channels. Before selecting channels, they must

be programmed into the DVD/VCR’s memory. In addition to normal

VHF and UHF channels, this DVD/VCR can receive up to 113 Cable

TV channels. To use this DVD/VCR with an antenna, set the TV/CABLE

menu option to the TV mode. When shipped from the factory, this menu

option is in the CABLE mode.

Press VCR MENU. Press

SET + or –

to select

“CH SETUP”, then press ENTER.

Press SET + or – to select “TV/CABLE”.

TV/CABLE selection Setting channels automatically

Repeat left step 1 and press SET + or – to

select “AUTO CH MEMORY”.

Press ENTER.

Auto tuning will begin. The channel dis-

play will count up and when finished,

the screen returns to normal.

Note:

You can’t select “CH SETUP” if you set the channel to “L1” or

“L2”.

Press ENTER to select the TV or CABLE

mode.

The arrow indicates the selected mode.

Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is

cleared.

TV - VHF/UHF channels

CABLE - Cable TV channels

VCR MENU

ENTER

〈 〉

DVD/VCR

Preparation:

• Turn ON the TV and select to the corresponding

video input.

• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.

• Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.

(The VCR indicator will light.)

SET +/–

DVD/VCR SELECT

Basic setup (VCR)

Repeat the step 1 on page . Then press SET +

or – to select the “ADD/DELETE” and press

ENTER.

To ADD/DELETE channels

Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is

cleared.

To Add or Delete channels

1) Press Direct channel selection buttons (0–9)

or SET +/– to select a channel number you want

to add or delete.

2) To add channels

Press ENTER until “ADD” appears on the screen.

To delete channels

Press ENTER until “DELETE” appears on the

screen. The channel number will blink.

3) Repeat step 1 and 2 to add or delete other

channel.

Noise elimination

When you don't want to receive a weak signal broadcast, a Blue

back screen can be obtained by selecting the NO NOISE BACK-

GROUND to “ON”. When the unit is shipped from the factory,

the NO NOISE BACKGROUND is set to “ON”.

Repeat the steps 1~2 on page and press

SET + or – to select “NO NOISE BACKGROUND”.

Press ENTER to select “ON” or “OFF” position.

〈〉

Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is

cleared.

0–9

ENTER

VCR MENU

〈〉

SET +/–

Playback (VCR)

Loading and unloading a cassette tape

Use only video cassette tapes marked .

Remove the erase prevention tab with a screwdriver. Cover the hole with a piece of adhesive tape.

To record again

Screwdriver

Automatic tape eject

This DVD/VCR will automatically rewind the tape when the tape has ended. Once the tape is rewound to its beginning,

the cassette tape will be ejected automatically.

Push the center of the tape until it is automatically

inserted.

Insert the cassette tape with its labeled side facing up

and the erase prevention tab positioned at your left. An

inverted cassette tape cannot be inserted.

Automatic playback

When loading a cassette tape without an erase prevention tab, playback will start automatically.

Automatic power ON

When you insert a cassette tape, the DVD/VCR power will turn ON automatically.

Erase prevention tab

Adhesive tape

Remove the cassette tape.

Erase prevention tab

Unloading

To prevent accidental erasure

Tape speed and maximum recording time

Video cassette tape

Tape Speed

SLP (Super Long Play)

T-160 T-120 T-90 T-60 T-30

2-2/3 hours 2 hours 1-1/2 hours 1 hour 30 minutes

8 hours 6 hours 4-1/2 hours 3 hours 1-1/2 hours

SP (Standard Play)

EJECT

Press EJECT on the front panel or on the remote.

Playback (VCR)

Cassette tape playback

To play a prerecorded tape.

Load a prerecorded tape

(When loading a cassette tape without the erase

prevention tab, playback will start automatically).

Preparation:

• Turn ON the TV and select the corresponding video input.

• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.

• Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.

(The VCR indicator will light).

Press PLAY.

Playback will start. “ ” will appear

on the screen for about 4 seconds.

Press STOP once.

The tape will stop but remain fully

loaded and ready to play.

“ ” will appear on the screen for

about 4 seconds.

To stop playback

Stop the playback or recording via STOP on remote

control.

To discontinue the tape-winding, press STOP. To switch to

playback directly (without STOP), press PLAY.

Notes:

• This VCR selects the playback tape speed SP, LP or SLP au-

tomatically.

• The Cassette tape and DVD disc can be played back simulta-

neously. If you press DVD/VCR SELECT, the tape playback

and DVD playback alternate with each other on the screen

(via CH3, 4 or video connection).

To start playback

Playback Rewind or forward the tape

To rewind the tape:

Press REV.

To forward the tape:

Press FWD.

Forward/Reverse picture search mode

When the tape is being winded, you can switch to picture

search mode (see page

). To do this, press REV or

FWD and hold it down. The unit will resume the tape

advance or rewinding as soon as the button is released.

PLAY

STOP

FWD

REV

DVD/VCR

DVD/VCR SELECT

Playback (VCR)

Special playback

Picture search

Reverse picture search function

Press REV once or twice during playback.

Forward picture search function

Press FWD once or twice during playback.

To return to playback, press PLAY.

Press PAUSE/STILL during playback.

To resume normal playback, press PLAY or PAUSE/STILL.

During playback press SLOW.

To return to playback, press PLAY.

Whenever you insert a tape and start playback, the

automatic tracking feature continuously analyzes the signal

to enable optimum picture quality during playback.

Press PAUSE/STILL during playback.

Press SLOW repeatedly. The picture advances frame by

frame.

To return to playback, press PLAY or PAUSE/STILL.

Slow tracking and vertical lock adjustment

If noise bars appear in the picture during slow motion,

press the SET + /– to reduce the noise bars.

If the still picture jitters excessively, press SET +/– to

stabilize the still picture.

Automatic tracking adjustment

If automatic tracking cannot eliminate noises well during

playback, press SET +/– to eliminate the noise. “MANUAL

TR.” will appear on the screen. Press it once for a fine

adjustment, or press and hold for a coarse adjustment.

Manual tracking adjustment

SPEED SEARCH TIMES

Adjusting tracking condition

Still picture

Slow motion

Frame by frame picture

Notes:

•

The audio output is muted during PICTURE SEARCH, STILL,

FRAME ADVANCE and SLOW MOTION.

• During picture search mode there will be noise bars. This is

not a defect.

• Playback will commence after approx. 5 minutes to protect

the video tape against excessive wear during pause mode.

Press ATR to reactivate automatic tracking again.

“AUTO TR.” will appear on the screen.

PICTURE SEARCH SPEED

PRESS TWICE

TAPE SPEED PRESS ONCE

SP (Standard Play)

LP (Long Play)

SLP (Super Long Play)

5 X

9 X

15 X

3 X

7 X

9 X

REV

PLAY

FWD

SLOW

ATR

PAUSE/STILL

Video head cleaning

Video head clogging

The video heads are the means by

which the DVD/VCR reads the picture

from the tape during playback. In the

unlikely event that the heads become

dirty enough to be clogged, no picture

will be displayed. This can easily be

determined if, during playback of a

known good tape, there is good sound,

but no picture (picture is extremely

snowy). If this is the case, the DVD/

VCR need to check and clean by the

qualified service personnel.

Notes:

•

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE VIDEO HEADS OR

SERVICE THE UNIT BY REMOVING THE REAR COVER.

• Video heads may eventually wear out and should be re-

placed when they fail to produce clear pictures.

• To help prevent video head clogging, use only good qual-

ity VHS tapes. Discard worn out tapes.

Good Picture

Snowy Picture

CM skip

Press CM SKIP during playback. The DVD/VCR will search

forward through approximately 30 seconds of the tape (e.g.

unwanted commercial time) for each press of CM SKIP (maxi-

mum six presses) and then resume normal playback.

For example : 1 press: 30 seconds of tape

2 press: 60 seconds of tape

3 press: 90 seconds of tape

CM SKIP

SET +/–

Playback (VCR)

COUNTER RESET

Convenience function

To cancel repeat mode:

Follow the above step 1, then press ENTER to select “OFF”

position. Press VCR MENU to return to the TV.

Press VCR MENU.

Press SET + or – to select “AUTO

REPEAT”.

Press ENTER to select “ON” or “OFF”.

If “ON” is selected, the playback will

be repeated endlessly.

Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is

cleared.

If you press CALL, “ ” will appear

on the screen

To commence playback, press PLAY.

The playback will be repeated

endlessly.

This function rewinds the tape to the

“00:00”

counter position

automatically.

Press CLOCK/COUNTER.

The counter display shows the tape run-

ning time during playback or recording.

Press COUNTER RESET at the desired tape

position.

The counter display will be reset to

“00:00” position (e.g. the beginning of

recording).

Press STOP when playback or recording is

completed.

Press ZERO RETURN.

The tape will automatically rewind or fast

forward to the “00:00” counter position.

Repeat playback

The entire video tape will play until its end. The tape will

automatically rewind to the beginning and the playback will be

repeated.

Zero return function

PLAY

VCR MENU

SET +/–

ENTER

STOP

ZERO RETURN

CLOCK/COUNTER

CALL

COUNTER RESET

Playback (VCR)

This function enables you to locate the beginning of any recording

made on the VCR.

Recording an INDEX mark

The Index Search function auto-

matically records an INDEX mark

on the tape whenever a recording

is initiated.

Index search

Press VISS + or

–

during stop or play mode.

For Succeeding programs: Press VISS +.

For Preceding programs: Press VISS –.

(As many as 9 index points can be accessed via this

method.)

SQPB (S-VHS Quasi Playback)

You can playback video cassette tapes recorded in the

S-VHS system.

However, the picture will not have the high resolution of

S-VHS system.

Note: You cannot record S-VHS video format with this VCR.

Notes:

• When you record an INDEX mark at the very beginning of the

tape, the mark may not be found.

• During INDEX search, the tape may stop and begin to play at a

slightly different location.

• INDEX may not function properly with old or worn out video

tapes.

• INDEX marks may not be found if it is extremely close to the point

where the search began.

• During recording, if you stop recording temporarily, the INDEX

mark is not recorded on the tape.

Video index search system

Press CLOCK/COUNTER. The clock and tape counter

alternate with each other in the display window.

Notes:

• If you rewind the tape beyond “00:00”, a minus sign (“–”) will

be displayed in front of the time.

• When you load a tape, the counter will reset to “00:00”.

• The counter does not function on non-recorded (blank)

sections of the tape. When you rewind, fast forward or play

tapes through blank sections, the counter stops.

Clock/counter display

COUNTER

CLOCK

Press DVD/VCR SELECT. The DVD mode and the

VCR mode alternate with each other in the display.

DVD mode

VCR mode INDEX NO. (up to 9)

or is displayed

STOP

DVD/VCR SELECT

VISS

–

CLOCK/COUNTER

When the VISS + or – is pressed,

the unit starts searching the se-

lected INDEX NO. and finds the

portion. Then playback starts au-

tomatically. To stop the Index

Search, press STOP.

Convenience function (Continued)

Recording (VCR)

Recording a TV program

Recording and viewing the same TV program.

Recording a TV program

Load a cassette tape with the erase prevention

tab intact.

The DVD/VCR will automatically turn on.

Press SP/SLP to select the desired tape speed

SP or SLP.

The tape counter and “SP” or “SLP”

will appear on the screen for about 4

seconds.

Select “TV” or “CABLE” to the appropriate

position .

TV - VHF/UHF channels

CABLE - Cable TV channels

Press Number buttons or CH +/– to select the

channel to be recorded.

Press REC/OTR.

“ ” will appear on the screen for

about 4 seconds and “REC” will

appear on the display window.

VHF/UHF/CABLE TV CHANNELS

TV CABLE TV

VHF

2-13

UHF

14-69

VHF

2-13

STD/HRC/IRC

14-36 (A) (W)

37-59 (AA) (WW)

60-85 (AAA) (ZZZ)

86-94 (86) (94)

95-99 (A-5) (A-1)

100-125 (100) (125)

01 (5A)

TV mode direct channel selection:

All channels can be instantly selected by using two

buttons. (for example, to select channel 2, press “0”, then

“2”. If you press only “2”, channel selection will be delayed

for two seconds.) For channels 10 and above, press the 2

digits in order.

CABLE mode direct channel selection:

1-9 Press 0 twice and then 1-9 as required.

Example: To select “2”, Press 002.

10-12 Press 0 first and then the remaining 2 digits in

order from left to right.

Example: Press 012 for “12”.

13-99 Press 2 digits in order.

Example: Press 22 for “22”.

100-125 Press the 3 digits in order.

Example: Press 110 for “110”.

0–9

REC/OTR

CH +/–

DVD/VCR

Preparation:

• Turn ON the TV and select to the corresponding

video input.

• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.

• Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.

(The VCR indicator will light.)

SP/SLP

DVD/VCR SELECT

Recording (VCR)

Press STOP to stop recording.

“ ” will appear on screen for about

4 seconds.

Press PAUSE/STILL to avoid recording unwanted

material. Press again to continue the recording.

“ ” will appear on screen for

about 4 seconds.

Notes:

•

The pause function will be released after 5 minutes to prevent

damage to the tape or the VCR. The VCR will change to the

STOP mode.

• You can select a recording channel in the recording pause

mode.

To stop recording temporarily

While the VCR is recording, select your desired channel

on the TV.

When a TV is connected with an antenna cable only,

press TV/VCR to select the TV position.

The “VCR” display will go off and recording will continue.

Select the TV channel you want to watch by using the

TV channel selector.

Note:

Some Cable TV hookups do not permit viewing one channel

while recording another. See pages and .

This VCR will automatically rewind the tape when the tape

has ended (except during OTR and timer recording). It will

also eject the tape.

Auto Rewind feature

To stop recording

TV/VCR

STOP

PAUSE/STILL

Recording a TV program (Continued)

Recording one program while watching another

Recording (VCR)

One-touch Timer Recording (OTR)

The One-touch Timer Recording feature provides a simple and

convenient way to make a timed recording.

One-touch Timer Recording (OTR)

Press

once

twice

3 times

4 times

5 times

NORMAL REC

0:30

1:00

1:30

2:00

3:00

4:00

5:00

6:00

NORMAL REC

Recording time Press

6 times

7 times

8 times

9 times

10 times

Recording time

Load a cassette tape with the erase

prevention tab intact.

The VCR will automatically turn on.

Press SP/SLP to select the desired tape speed

SP or SLP.

The tape counter and “SP” or “SLP”

will appear on the screen for about 4

seconds.

Set “TV” or “CABLE” option to the appropriate

position .

TV - VHF/UHF channels

CABLE- Cable TV channels

Press Direct channel selection buttons (0–9) or

CH +/– to select the channel to be recorded.

Press

REC/OTR

. Recording begins. Press the

button again to stop recording after 30 minutes.

Each additional press of

REC/OTR

will increase

recording time as shown in the chart below, up

to a maximum of 6 hours.

The OTR and recording time will

appear on the screen for about 4

seconds. And, “ ” will appear on

the display.

To cancel OTR

Press STOP or turn off the power.

“ ” will appear on screen for about 4 seconds.

Note:

If you wish to watch the DVD playback during OTR or standard

recording, press DVD/VCR SELECT to change to DVD mode

and perform the DVD playback

0–9

CH +/–

REC/OTR

SP/SLP

DVD/VCR

STOP

Preparation:

• Turn ON the TV and select to the corresponding

video input.

• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.

• Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.

(The VCR indicator will light.)

Example: One-touch Timer Recording for 30 minutes.

DVD/VCR SELECT

Recording (VCR)

Timer recording

Timer recording can be programmed on-screen with the remote control.

The built-in timer allows automatic unattended recording of up to 8

programs within 1 month.

Timer recording

Notes:

• Press CANCEL to move cursor backward for correction.

• To record from external source set the channel to “L1” or

“L2”.

Notes:

• If the timer symbol ( ) blinks when the timer recording ended,

the TV program has not been completely recorded because of

an insufficient tape length. Press TIMER REC to cancel the

timer program or press EJECT to remove the cassette tape.

• During timer recording standby mode, the VCR mode cannot be

operated. To use the VCR, first press TIMER REC then press

DVD/VCR SELECT to change to VCR mode. After VCR mode

is selected, press TIMER REC again to put the VCR into timer

recording standby mode.

• If you press TIMER REC during timer recording, the recording

operation will be interrupted. If you press TIMER REC again

within the programmed time, the recording operation will start

again.

• After a power failure or disconnection of the power plug, all

programmed recording settings and time display will be lost

upon resumption of power. In this case, reset the clock and

reprogram any timer recording.

Press VCR MENU. Select “TIMER REC SET”,

then press ENTER.

Preparation:

• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.

• Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.

• Load a cassette tape with the erase prevention tab

intact.

• Check the time and date are correct .

Example: Program a timer recording for the 26th day,

channel 125 (Cable TV), 11:00 - 11:30 PM on timer

program number 1 (Tape speed: SLP).

Press SET + or – to select one of the program

line, then press ENTER.

Press SET + or – to select the date, then press

ENTER.

Set the start time, end time, channel and tape

speed as in step 3.

To enter other programs, repeat steps 2

through 4.

• To return to the normal screen,

press VCR MENU twice.

Press TIMER REC. The timer symbol ( ) will

appear on the display and the VCR standbys

for recording.

At the same time, VCR mode will

change to DVD mode automatically.

You can use DVD even if the VCR is

in the timer recording mode.

If you do not use the DVD, turn the

power off.

Notes:

• The timer recording will start at 5 seconds before the

preset starting time.

• If the timer symbol ( ) does not appear on the display

when TIMER REC is pressed, the cassette is not inserted

• If the cassette is ejected when TIMER REC is pressed, the

erase prevention tab of the cassette may have been

removed

• During Timer recording, the power cannot be turned off.

SET +/–

DVD/VCR

ENTER

CANCEL

VCR MENU

EJECT

TIMER REC

DVD/VCR SELECT

〈 〉

Recording (VCR)

Setting procedure

To set daily/weekly timer

To confirm Timer program:

At step 1 on page

, select “TIMER REC SET”

and press ENTER.

The timer program list will appear on the screen.

The current day (Friday) SU-SA (Sunday to Saturday)

MO-SA (Monday to Saturday)

MO-FR (Monday to Friday)

WKL-WE WKL-TH (Weekly Thursday)

(Weekly Wednesday)

One month later

minus one day

Weekly (e.g. WKL-TU: each Tuesday) or daily (e.g. MO-

SA: Monday to Saturday) Timer recording

Follow the procedure of timer recording on page

. At

step 3, press SET + or – repeatedly until the desired setting

appears. Then press ENTER.

When you press SET – repeatedly, the

DATE indicator will change as follows, in

this case the day is Friday.

If the programs overlap another

Do not overlap timer programs as portions of the

conflicting programs will be lost. The first recording

time has priority over the next recording time as shown

in the diagram below.

Notes:

• The daily/weekly recording can be made continuously until the

recording is canceled or the tape reaches the end.

• During timer recording the automatic rewinding mechanism

does not function.

8 : 00 11 : 00

9 : 00 10 : 00

Program 1

Prog.1

Deleted Parts

Non Recorded Portion Parts

Prog.2 Prog.3

Program 2

Program 3

Recording

Control Settings

〈 〉

〈+/

—

/ENTER/CANCEL/MENU〉

DATE START END CH

26(SA)

:00

:30

125

SLP

Notes:

• If there are other timer record programs remaining, TIMER

REC must be pressed to reactivate the timer, otherwise the

remaining timer record programs will be ignored.

• You cannot confirm the Timer program during timer recording

operation.

• You can correct or cancel a programmed setting in program

confirm mode.

If the Timer has been activated, press TIMER

REC to deactivate the Timer.

The timer symbol ( ) will

disappear. Then press DVD/VCR

SELECT to change to VCR mode.

To cancel Timer program:

Press SET + or – to select the unwanted program,

then press CANCEL to cancel the program.

Press VCR MENU repeatedly until the menu

screen is cleared.

To confirm or cancel a program

SET +/–

ENTER

VCR MENU

CANCEL

DVD/VCR SELECT

TIMER REC

〈 〉

Other functions (VCR)

Stereo recording and playback/

Second Audio Program (SAP)

When a MTS STEREO broad-

cast is received, “STEREO” will

appear on the screen for about

4 seconds and the program can

be viewed or recorded in stereo.

The Hi-Fi stereo recording pro-

cedure is the same as for normal

recordings.

Notes:

• When playing back a tape that is not recorded in Hi-Fi stereo

mode, the audio will automatically be monaural.

• When listening to a VHS Hi-Fi video tape or MTS broadcast

through the VHF/UHF jack (Audio/Video cable not connected),

the sound will be monaural.

When viewing an MTS stereo TV program, or playing a

prerecorded VHS Hi-Fi stereo videotape, press AUDIO

SELECT to select how the audio will be heard through

the speakers. Normally set to the Hi-Fi stereo position,

this button can be set to the MONO position if the

stereo broadcast or videotape audio is of poor quality.

The “R” and “L” positions allow the audio from the Right

or Left Hi-Fi channel to be heard over both TV speak-

ers. This button has no effect when viewing a MONO

videotape or TV program. Each time when you press

the button, OUTPUT SELECTION display appears on

the screen for several seconds. Refer to the chart

below.

Output selection

Your DVD/VCR is fitted with a SAP broadcast system which

enables you to switch to a second audio program when view-

ing a selected channel.

This function applies only when the program is broadcast in

multi-languages through the SAP broadcast system.

When the VCR is turned on or a channel selection is

made, make certain the letters “SAP” appears on the

screen for about 4 seconds. This means that the “Second

Audio Program” broadcasting is available.

Listening to SAP

Stereo recording and playback

The VHS Hi-Fi audio system permits high fidelity record-

ing of MTS STEREO TV broadcasts.

Second Audio Program (SAP)

OUTPUT

SELECTION

STEREO

L ch

R ch

MONO

SOUND HEARD ON BOTH

SPEAKERS

STEREO

LEFT CHANNEL AUDIO

RIGHT CHANNEL AUDIO

MONO

Press VCR MENU. Then press SET + or – to

select “SAP”.

Press ENTER to select “ON”.

Then press VCR MENU until the

menu screen is cleared.

STEREO

SET +/–

ENTER

VCR MENU

Note:

When using a Cable TV system, stereo TV programs may

be transmitted over a mono cable channel. In this case

“STEREO” will not appear and the sound will be in mono.

AUDIO SELECT

Other functions (VCR)

To AUDIO (L) OUT

AUDIO/VIDEO cable (supplied)

Playback VCR

To VIDEO OUT To AUDIO (R) OUT

Recording VCR

To AUDIO (L) IN

To VIDEO IN To AUDIO (R) IN

Duplicating a video tape

If you connect the DVD/VCR to another VCR or Camcorder, you can duplicate

a previously recorded tape. Make all connections before turning on the power.

Duplicating a video tape

For duplicating a previously recorded tape from a

camcorder, follow the camcorder manufacturer’s

instructions. A typical camcorder dubbing hookup is

shown above.

AUDIO/VIDEO cable (not supplied)

To AUDIO (R) IN

To AUDIO (L) IN

To VIDEO IN

Recording VCR

To AV Jack

Playback Camcorder

Connection with second VCR

Connection with Camcorder

Press SP/SLP to select the desired tape speed

SP or SLP.

It is recommended to set the tape

speed to the SP mode on the

recording VCR for best results.

Press INPUT SELECT once or twice to select

AUDIO/VIDEO input position.

“L1” or “L2” will appear in the display.

Press REC/OTR on the recording VCR.

The duplicating process begins.

Press PLAY on the playback VCR or Camcorder.

Press STOP when you finish duplicating.

L1: on the rear panel

L2: on the front panel

Preparation:

• Turn ON the TV and select the corresponding video

input.

• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.

• Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.

(The VCR indicator will light.)

• Load a cassette tape with the erase prevention tab

intact.

• Load a previously recorded tape into the playback

VCR or Camcorder.

REC/OTR

STOP

SP/SLP

INPUT SELECT

DVD/VCR SELECT

DVD/VCR

Other functions (VCR)

Press REC/OTR to start recording.

The DVD/VCR will change to the

VCR mode automatically and the

playback picture or sound will be

duplicated on the video cassette

tape.

Recording a DVD/CD disc

You can record disc material in DVD, Video CD, Audio CD, etc.

onto a Video tape with this DVD/VCR.

Duplicating a DVD or CD disc

Press SP/SLP to select the desired tape speed

SP or SLP.

Preparation:

• Turn ON the TV and select the corresponding video

input.

• Press DVD/VCR to operate the DVD/VCR.

• Press DVD/VCR SELECT to select the VCR mode.

(The VCR indicator will light.)

•

Load a cassette tape with the erase prevention tab intact.

• Load a DVD/CD disc.

Press DVD/VCR SELECT selector to select the

DVD mode.

The DVD indicator will light.

Press PLAY to start playback.

Press STOP when you finish recording.

If you wish to stop a DVD/CD disc,

press

DVD/VCR SELECT

selector to

change the DVD mode, then press

STOP.

Notes:

• You may not be able to record the beginning of the disc.

Begin VCR recording once program playback commences

on the DVD.

• When the scanning mode is set to the progressive mode,

you cannot duplicate a disc material onto a video tape.

When REC/OTR is pressed, the PROGRESSIVE indicator

“” on the display window will flash.

• When the HDMI mode is ON (480p, 720p, 1080i), you

cannot duplicate a disc material onto a video tape.

• You cannot record discs encoded with copy guard

function. The following icon and text will show up on the

TV screen.

DISC IS COPY PROTECTED

SP/SLP

STOP

DVD/VCR

PLAY

REC/OTR

DVD/VCR SELECT

Basic playback (DVD)

CAUTION

Keep your fingers well clear of the

disc tray as it is closing. Neglecting

to do so may cause serious

personal injury.

Basic playback

Playing a disc

This section shows you the basics on how to play a disc.

Basic playback (DVD)

Preparations:

• When you want to view a disc, turn on the TV and select the corresponding video input connected to the DVD/VCR.

This may include S-video or component video inputs which are exclusive to DVD playback.

• When you want to enjoy the sound of discs from the audio system, turn on the audio system and select the input

connected to the DVD/VCR.

DVD

VCD

Press OPEN/CLOSE or PLAY on the unit.

The disc tray closes automatically.

On the TV-screen, “ ” changes to

“Reading” and then playback

commences.

• A menu screen will appear on the TV screen, if

the disc has a menu feature.

Press / or / to select title.

Press ENTER.

• Title is selected and play

commences.

Press STOP to end playback.

• The unit records the stopped point,

depending on the disc. “ ”

appears on the screen. Press

PLAY

to resume playback (from

the scene point).

• If you press STOP again or unload

the disc (“ ” appears on the

screen.), the unit will clear the

stopped point.

Press ON/STANDBY.

The DVD/VCR turns on.

Press VCR/DVD on the unit to select the DVD mode.

The DVD indicator will light.

Press OPEN/CLOSE.

The disc tray opens.

Place the disc on the disc tray.

With the playback

side down

• There are two different disc sizes. Place the disc

in the correct guide on the disc tray. If the disc is

out of the guide, it may damage the disc and

cause the DVD/VCR to malfunction.

• Do not place a disc which is unplayable in this

DVD/VCR.

To start playback in the stop mode

Press PLAY.

1Press DVD/VCR on the remote control to

operate the DVD/VCR.

C/D/B/A

ENTER

DVD/VCR

Display window OPEN/CLOSE

STOP Disc trayVCR/DVD

PLAY

ON/STANDBY

Reading

Basic playback (DVD)

To pause playback (still mode)

Press PAUSE/STILL during playback.

To resume normal playback, press

PLAY.

• The sound is muted during still

mode.

To stop playback

Press STOP.

Notes:

• If a non-compatible disc is loaded, “Incorrect Disc”, “Region Code Error” or “Parental Error” will appear on the TV screen

according to the type of loaded disc. In this case, check your disc again .

• Some discs may take a minute or so to start playback.

• When you set a single-faced disc label downwards (i.e. the wrong way up) and press OPEN/CLOSE or PLAY on the unit,

“Reading” will appear on the display for a few minutes and then “Incorrect Disc” will continue to be displayed.

•Some discs may not work the resuming facility.

• Resuming cannot function when you play a PBC-featured Video CD while the PBC is on. To turn off the PBC, see page

• Some playback operations of DVDs may be intentionally fixed by software producers. Since this unit plays DVDs according to

the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. Also refer to the

instructions supplied with the DVDs.

• Do not move the unit during playback. Doing so may damage the disc.

• Use the OPEN/CLOSE to open and close the disc tray. Do not push the disc tray while it is moving. Doing so may cause the

unit to malfunction.

• Do not push up on the disc tray or put any objects other than discs on the disc tray. Doing so may cause the unit to

malfunction.

• In many instances, a menu screen will appear after playback of a movie is completed. Prolonged display of an on-screen

menu may damage your television set, permanently etching that image onto its screen. To avoid this, be sure to press

POWER on your remote control once the movie is completed.

• There may be a slight delay between the button is pressed and the function activates.

• The screen saver does not operate when connecting this DVD/VCR to the TV using the HDMI cable.

Screen saver function

The screen saver operates when you leave the unit in

DVD stop mode for approx. five minutes.

The screen will repeatedly get dark gradually and back

to normal.

Please press any button when you want to return to an

usual screen.

To turn on or off the screen saver, see page .

OPEN/CLOSE

STOP

PAUSE/STILL

PLAY

To remove the disc

Press OPEN/CLOSE.

Remove the disc after the disc tray

opens completely.

Be sure to press OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc tray

after you remove the disc.

POWER

Playing a Disc while the VCR section is recording

or standing by for timer recording

1) Start to record.

Follow steps 1~5 on page .

•If the DVD/VCR is standing by for recording, turn on

the DVD/VCR.

2) Press DVD/VCR SELECT selector to select DVD mode.

3) Play a disc.

Follow steps 4 ~ 6 on page

•Press PLAY if the DVD/VCR does not start to play a

disc automatically.

4) Stop to play.

Press STOP to stop play back a disc.

DVD/VCR SELECT

Basic playback

DVD

VCD

To obtain a higher quality picture

Occasionally, some picture noise not usually visible on the TV screen during a normal

broadcast may appear while playing a DVD video disc.

It is because due to high resolution pictures on these discs which include a lot of

information. The amount of noise depends on the disc you use with this unit. You should

generally reduce the sharpness adjustment on your TV when viewing DVD video discs.

About

DVD VCD CD

The

DVD VCD CD

icons on the heading bar show the playable discs for the

function described under that heading.

DVD

: You can use this function with DVD video discs.

VCD

: You can use this function with Video CDs.

: You can use this function with Audio CDs and CD-R/RW CDs.

: You can use this function with USB Mass Storage.

Basic playback (DVD)

Playing a disc (Continued)

You can play discs at various speeds.

Playing frame by frame

DVD

VCD

DVD

VCD

Playing in fast reverse or fast forward directions

Press REV or FWD during playback.

REV: Fast reverse playback

FWD: Fast forward playback

Each time you press REV or FWD,

the playback speed changes.

To resume normal playback

Press PLAY.

Notes:

• The DVD/VCR mutes sound and subtitles during reverse

and forward scan of DVD/VCD video discs. However, this

unit plays sound during fast forward or fast reverse play of

audio CDs.

• The playback speed may differ depending on the disc.

Press PAUSE/STILL during still playback.

Each time you press PAUSE/STILL,

the picture advances one frame.

To resume normal playback

Press PLAY.

Note:

The sound is muted during frame by frame playback.

Press SLOW during playback.

Each time you press the button, the

slow-motion speed changes.

To resume normal playback

Press PLAY.

Note:

The sound is muted during slow-motion playback.

Press SKIP or repeatedly to display the chapter or track number you want.

Playback starts from the selected chapter or track.

To locate succeeding chapters or

tracks. Playback starts from the beginning of the

current chapter or track.

When you press twice in quick successions,

playback starts from the beginning of the

preceding chapter or track.

• A prohibition symbol “ ” may appear at the upper right of the screen. This symbol means either the feature you tried is not

available on the disc, or the DVD/VCR cannot access the feature at this time. This does not indicate a problem with the DVD/

VCR.

• The unit is capable of holding a still video image or On screen display image on your television screen indefinitely. If you leave

the still video image or On screen display image displayed on your TV for an extended period of time, you risk permanent

damage to your television screen. Projection televisions are very susceptible.

Notes:

Locating a chapter or track

Playing in slow-motion

DVD

VCD

DVD

VCD

FWD

REV

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

SKIP /

SLOW

FWD

Advanced playback (DVD)

Zooming

Press ZOOM during playback.

The center part of the image will be

zoomed in.

Each press of ZOOM will change the

ZOOM 1 (x 1.3), 2 (x 1.5) and 3

(x 2.0).

Zooming/Locating desired scene

This unit will allow you to zoom in on the frame image. You can then make selections by switching the position of the frame.

Press CC

C/DD

D/BB

B/A A

A A

A to view a different part of the

frame.

You may move the frame from the

center position to UP, DOWN, LEFT or

RIGHT direction.

Notes:

• You can select the Pause, Slow or Search playback in the zoom mode.

• Some discs may not respond to zoom feature.

Locating desired scene

Use the title, chapter and time recorded on the DVD disc to locate the desired point to play back. In the case of VCD/CD

discs, time and track are used to locate the desired point to play back. To check the title, chapter and time, press DISPLAY.

C/D/B/A

ZOOM

0–9

ENTER

DISPLAY

CLEAR

JUMP

In the zoom mode, press ZOOM repeatedly to

return to a 1:1 view ( Off).

Press JUMP during playback or resume stop

mode.

Press C C

C C

C or DD

D to select the “Title/Track”, “Chapter”

or “Time”.

Press Number buttons (0–9) to change the

number.

• If you input a wrong number, press

CLEAR.

• Refer to the package supplied with

the disc to check the numbers.

Press ENTER. Playback starts.

• When you change the title,

playback starts from Chapter 1 of

the selected title.

• Some discs may not work in the

above operation.

DVD

VCD

DVD

VCD

Time

Title

Chapter

Jump

Time

Title

Chapter

Jump

Notes:

• In case of the Audio CD and Video-CD, only Track and Time

can be selected.

• In case of the Video-CD playback with PBC, the JUMP does

not work. Turn off the PBC

Time

Title

Chapter 12

Jump

Advanced playback (DVD)

Marking the scenes Returning to the scenes

Press MARKER during playback or stop mode.

Marking desired scenes

The unit stores the points that you want to watch again up to 3 points.

You can resume playback from each scene.

Notes:

Some discs may not work with the marking operation.

The marking is canceled when you open the disc tray or

turn the power off.

Some subtitles recorded around the marker may fail to

appear.

In case of Video CD with PBC, Marker function is prohibited.

•

To cancel the Marker

Follow the above steps 1~2, then press CLEAR.

ENTER

CLEAR

MARKER

C/D

Press MARKER during playback.

Select the blank Marker using C or D.

Then press ENTER at the desired scene.

• Repeat this procedure to set the

other 2 scenes.

Press MARKER to clear this display.

Press ENTER.

Playback starts from the marked

scene.

Press C or D to select the Marker 1-3.

DVD

VCD

DVD

VCD

Advanced playback (DVD)

Repeat playback

Press PLAYMODE during playback or stop mode.

Repeat playback/A-B Repeat playback

Press PLAYMODE again to clear the screen.

A-B Repeat playback

Press A-B RPT during playback.

The start point is selected.

A-B repeat playback allows you to repeat material between

two selected points.

Notes:

• In A-B Repeat mode, subtitles near the A or B locations may

not be displayed.

• You cannot set the A-B Repeat for the scenes that include

multiple angles.

• A-B Repeat playback does not work when Repeat playback is

activated.

• You may not be able to set A-B Repeat, during certain scenes

of the DVD.

• A-B Repeat does not work with an interactive DVD, MP3/WMA/

JPEG/DivX® CD.

• A-B Repeat is prohibited when PBC is on.

To resume normal playback

Press A-B RPT again.

“

Off

” appears on the screen.

Notes:

• Some discs may not work with the repeat operation.

• In case of Video CD with PBC, repeat functions are prohib-

ited during playback.

• Chapter/Track repeat function is canceled whenever

SKIP or is pressed.

[DVD]

Press ENTER to select “Chapter” or “Title”.

The unit automatically starts repeat

playback after finishing the current ti-

tle or chapter.

[Video CD]

Press DD

D to select “Repeat”.

Press ENTER to select “Track” or “All”.

The unit automatically starts repeat

playback after finishing the current

track.

• If you set the repeat mode during stop mode,

press PLAY to start Repeat playback.

[Audio CD and MP3/WMA CD]

Please see “Repeat playback (CD/USB)” .

Press A-B RPT again.

The end point is selected. Playback

starts at the point that you selected.

Playback stops at the end point, re-

turns to Point A automatically, then

starts again.

To resume normal playback

Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.

ENTER

DVD

VCD

Play Mode

Repeat : Off

DVD

VCD

PLAYMODE

A-B RPT

PLAY

Advanced playback (DVD)

Program playback

Press PLAYMODE during stop mode.

Press BB

B/AA

A to return to the left column, then

press CC

C/D D

D D

D to select the “Program Playback”

and press ENTER.

The programs you selected will start to playback in

the order.

•To resume normal playback, select Mode

“Off” in step 2.

Program playback/Random playback

You can arrange the playback order of tracks or files on the disc.

And the unit can also select tracks or files at random and playback

them. These feature works for Video CD.

For Audio CD and MP3/WMA CD, please see “Random playback

(CD/USB)” and “Program playback (CD/USB)”

Random playback

Press CC

C/DD

D to select “Mode”, then press

ENTER to select “Random”.

Press PLAY.

The Random Playback will start.

Note:

In playing back the Video CD with PBC, you cannot set

Random playback.

■To change the program

1. Select Mode to “Program” (as step 2), press B /A/C/

D to select the track number you want to change, then

press CLEAR.

2. Press Number buttons (0–9) to overwrite the new

track number.

■To clear the program one by one

Select Mode to “Program”, press B/A/C/D to select the

track number. Then press CLEAR.

■To clear all the programs

In the left column, press C/D to select “Clear Program”.

Then press ENTER.

Notes:

• In playing back the Video CD with PBC, you cannot set

Program playback.

• The program is canceled when you open the disc tray or

turn the power off.

Press CC

C/DD

D to select “Mode”, then press

ENTER to select “Program”.

Press BB

B/AA

A to select the right column, then use

Number buttons (0–9) to input the track numbers.

• If you input a wrong number, press

CLEAR.

Press PLAYMODE during playback or stop mode.

• If you set “Random” during playback mode,

Random playback will begin after the track that is

currently being played has ended.

• To resume normal playback, select Mode

“Off” in step 2.

1— — —

2— — —

3— — —

Play Mode

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

Mode : Off

1– – –

2– – –

3– – –

Play Mode

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

Mode : Program

1 9

2– – –

3– – –

Play Mode

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

Mode : Program

1 9

2 3

3 11

Play Mode

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

Mode : Program

VCD

ENTER

C/D/B/A

PLAYMODE

PLAY

0–9

CLEAR

1– – –

2– – –

3– – –

Play Mode

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

Mode : Random

Advanced playback (DVD)

Press CC

C/DD

D/BB

B/AA

A to select the desired title.

Changing angles/Title selection/DVD menu

Press ANGLE during playback.

The current angle will appear.

When playing back a disc recorded with multi-angle facility, you can change the angle that you are viewing the scene from.

Press ANGLE repeatedly until the desired angle

is selected.

Note:

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the

angles even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD.

Two or more titles are recorded on some discs. If the title menu is recorded on the disc, you can select the desired title.

Press ENTER or PLAY.

The playback of the selected title will

start.

Note:

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to select the title.

Depending on the DVD, a “title menu” may simply be called a

“menu” or “title” in the instructions supplied with the disc.

Press CC

C/DD

D/BB

B/AA

A to select the desired item.

Some DVDs allow you to select the disc contents using the menu.

When you play back these DVDs, you can select the subtitle language and sound-track language, etc. using the menu.

Press ENTER.

The menu continues to another

screen. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set

the item completely.

Press TOP MENU during playback.

Title menu appears on the screen.

Press DVD MENU during playback.

The DVD menu appears on the screen.

• Press DVD MENU again to resume

playback at the scene when you

press DVD MENU.

Note:

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to resume playback

from the scene point when you press DVD MENU.

DVD

1/2

DVD

Changing angles

Title selection

DVD menu

ANGLE

ENTER

C/D/B/A

TOP MENU

PLAY

DVD MENU

Advanced playback (DVD)

Changing soundtrack language/

Setting surround sound

Changing soundtrack language

Press AUDIO during playback.

The current soundtrack language will

appear.

You can select the language when you play a multilingual disc.

In case of Video CD playback

Audio type changes as follows each time you press AUDIO.

DVD

VCD

1/2 Eng Dolby Digital

L R

Notes:

• If the desired language is not heard after pressing the

button several times, the language is not recorded on

the disc.

• Changing soundtrack language is canceled when you

open the disc tray. The initial default language or available

language will be heard if the disc is played back again.

Press AUDIO repeatedly until the desired lan-

guage is selected.

•The on screen display will disappear after a few

seconds.

2/2 Fre Dolby Digital

Press B or A to select “On”.

• The on screen display will disappear after a few

seconds.

Setting surround sound

This DVD video player equipped with a “QSound”. It can produce the effect of being in a cinema or a concert hall.

To cancel Surround mode:

Follow the left steps 1~2, then press B or A to select the

“Off” position.

Notes:

• The QSound setting can also be changed in the function

setting .

• The “QSound” works only when the DVD disc recorded

with Dolby Digital is played back.

• When this function works, the volume might changed.

• When the voice is distorted, turn off QSound.

During disc playback press AUDIO.

Manufactured under license from QSound Labs,

Inc. U.S. patent Nos. 5,105,462, 5,208,860 and

5,440,638 and various foreign counterpart.

QXpander™ is a trademark of QSound Labs, Inc.

DVD

AUDIO

B/A

Advanced playback (DVD)

Subtitles/To turn off the PBC

When playing back a disc recorded with subtitles, you can

select the subtitle language or turn the subtitle off.

To turn off the subtitle, press SUBTITLE until

“Off” appears.

• The on screen display will disappear after a few

seconds.

Notes:

• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change

subtitles, or to turn subtitles on or off.

• While playing a DVD, the subtitle may change when you

open or close the disc tray.

• In some cases, a selected subtitle language may not be

changed immediately.

Subtitles

Press SUBTITLE repeatedly during playback

until your desired language appears.

DVD

To turn off the PBC (see page 8)

Press / to select “Mode”, then press

ENTER repeatedly until “Off” appear.

Press PLAYMODE in the stop mode.

Press PLAYMODE again to clear the screen.

Follow the above steps 1~2, then press ENTER repeatedly

until “PBC” appear.

To turn on the PBC

1/5 Eng

Off

1— — —

2— — —

3— — —

Play Mode

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

Mode : Off

SUBTITLE

ENTER

PLAYMODE

C/D

Advanced playback (DVD)

MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX

and Audio CD operation

This player can playback the MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®-data which has been recorded on CD-R/RW or USB Mass Storage. To

produce the MP3/WMA JPEG/DivX®-data, you need a Windows-PC with CD-RW drive or USB memory device and a MP3/

WMA/JPEG/DivX®-encoding Software (not supplied). The Apple-HFS-System cannot be played.

This player requires discs/recordings to meet certain technical standards in order to achieve optimal playback quality.

There are many different types of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing MP3/WMA files). Not all

recordable discs will produce optimal playback quality. The technical criteria set forth in this owner's manual are meant

only as a guide. Use of CD-RW for MP3 files is not recommended.

You must obtain any required permission from copyright owners to download or use copyrighted content.

Toshiba cannot and does not grant such permission.

MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® - data information

Limitations on MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® playback

• MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CD/USB Mass Storage are standardized by ISO9660, its file name must include following

extensions; “.mp3”, “.wma”, “.jpg”, “.div”, “.divx”, “.avi”.

• MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CD/USB Mass Storage must be correspond to the ISO standardized files.

• This unit can read 600 files per disc. If one directory has more than 600 files, it reads up to 600 files, the remaining files

will be omitted. (In case of USB Mass Storage, this limitation becomes 2,000 files).

• The unit is able to recognize up to a maximum of 50 directories per disc or USB Mass Storage.

• MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CDs/USB Mass Storage cannot be used for the purpose of recording.

• If the CD/USB Mass Storage has both audio tracks and MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® files, only audio tracks are played.

• It may take more than one minute for this unit to read MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® files depending on its structure.

• Music recorded by “Joliet Recording Specification” can be played back, the file name is displayed (within 15 letters) on

the screen. Long file names will be condensed.

• The music files recorded by “Hierarchical File System” (HFS) cannot be played.

Limitations on display.

• The maximum number for display is 15 letters.

Available characters for display are the following:

capital or small alphabets of A through Z, numbers of 0 through 9, and _ (under score).

• Other characters than those above are replaced in hyphen.

Notes on MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® files

To playback MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CD/USB Mass Storage in the recorded order,

1. Use MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® software that records data alphabetically or numerically.

2. Insert two or three digit number in the head of file name. (ex. “01” “02” or “001” “002”).

3. Refrain from making too many sub-folders.

CAUTION:

• Some MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CDs/USB Mass Storage cannot be played back depending on the recording conditions.

• The CD-R/RW or USB Mass Storage that has no music data or non MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® files cannot be played back.

Standard sampling frequency, and the bit rate:

MP3

MPEG-1 Audio

32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz

32kbps ~ 320kbps (constant bit rate or variable bit rate)

The recommend recording setting for a high-quality sound is 44.1kHz of sampling frequency and 128kbps of constant bit

rate.

WMA

WMA version 7 and 8

32kHz/48kbps, 44.1kHz/48kbps~192kbps, 48kHz/128kbps~192kbps

The file recorded by mono, 48kHz, 48 kbps is not available to this unit.

DivX® video

DivX® version: DivX® 3, 4, 5, and 6 (specifically 3.1.1, 4.1.2, 5.0.2, 5.0.5, 5.1.1, 5.2.1, 6.0 at Home Theater profile).

Audio format: MPEG1 Layer2 (MP2), MPEG1 Layer3 (MP3)

Sampling frequencies: 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz

Bit rate: 32kbps ~ 320kbps

Resolution: Max 720 x 576 (at 25fps), Max 720 x 480 (at 30fps)

Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries.

DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trade marks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.

Advanced playback (DVD)

MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX

and Audio

CD operation (Continued)

A file browser screen will be appear on the

screen.

• In case the current directory includes 9 files or more,

press or to scroll in the file list.

• To see contents in folder, select the folder and then

press ENTER. To return to the upstairs directory, select

“ Go Up ...” then press ENTER.

• In case of a CD/USB Mass Storage containing a mixture

of MP3, WMA, JPEG and DivX® files, the files are played

back by selecting them from the file browser.

Loading media

ENTER

▲/▼//

STOP

Notes:

• MP3 or WMA file on the Kodak Picture CD is not recognized

on this unit.

• During MP3/WMA/JPEG-Playback, you cannot use Jump and

A-B Repeat functions.

• You can use Repeat (Track or All), Random functions and

Program playback for MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®-Playback ,

• At USB mode with no disc on the tray, you can move to DISC

mode when you press OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control.

[MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CD, Audio CD]

Place a MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CD or an Audio

CD onto the disc tray, then press OPEN/CLOSE.

[USB Mass Storage]

Connect USB Mass Storage to the USB port on

the front of the unit (see page ).

PLAY

Select Files

The file type to make it display in the file browser can be chosen.

1. Press B or A to highlight “Select Files” at right column

in the file browser.

2. Press ENTER, then press or to select file type

from the list (Music, Picture or Movie).

3. Press ENTER to add/remove check mark. Checked file

type will be displayed in the file browser.

4. Press RETURN to save the setting.

OPEN/CLOSE

Press DVD/USB to display the media selection

window. Press B or A to select the DISC

mode or the USB mode, then press ENTER.

You cannot select the mode if

DISC/USB media is not inserted.

MP3/WMA and Audio CD playback

In the file browser, press / to select the

desired file.

When PLAY is pressed after the file browser displayed,

playback begins automatically starting from the first file. In

this case, if the first file is an MP3/WMA file, only MP3/

WMA files are played back in order. If the first file is a

JPEG file, the first JPEG file is played back. If the first file is

a DivX® file, the first DivX® file is played back. If there is no

file at a root directory, playback does not begin

automatically

Press ENTER. The selected file starts playing

back.

Press STOP to end playback.

• The unit records the stopped point. “ ” appears on the

screen. Press PLAY to resume playback (from the scene

point).

• If you press STOP again or unload the disc, the unit will

clear the stopped point.

DVD/USB

RETURN

DISC USB

Advanced playback (DVD)

The slide show enables you to view pictures (files) one after

another automatically.

Preparation:

Set “JPEG Interval” setting to “5 Seconds”, “10 Seconds”

or “15 Seconds” .

In the file browser, press C/D to select the

desired JPEG file.

To display a thumbnail list, press DVD MENU.

Press B/A or C/D to select the desired file.

(To return to a file browser, press TOP MENU.)

Press ENTER. The selected picture appears on

the screen.

Rotating an image

You can rotate an image by 90 degrees by

pressing ANGLE during playback of the image.

“”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the

screen.

Zooming an image

Zoom function also can be used in viewing JPEG

files. Press ZOOM (See “Zooming” ).

Press STOP to end playback.

The file browser appears on the

screen. If you want to watch the

other file, repeat steps 1 ~ 2.

JPEG playback

Select your desired starting file for the slide

show in step 1 on the left.

Press ENTER or PLAY to start slide show from

the selected file.

•If you press PAUSE/STILL during the slide show, the

slide show stops temporary. “ 4 ” appears briefly on

the screen.

If the picture appears upside down or sideways, press

ANGLE repeatedly until it’s right side up.

Press PLAY or SKIP again to resume the slide show.

•When the slide show playback finished, the file list ap-

pears.

•To stop the slide show, press STOP. The file list ap-

pears.

Slide show playback

When PLAY is pressed after displaying the file

browser, playback begins

automatically starting

from the first file. In this case,

if the first file is a

JPEG file, the first JPEG file is played back. If the

first file is a DivX® file, the first DivX® file is

played back. If the first file is an MP3/WMA file,

only MP3/WMA files are played back in order. If

there is no file at a root directory, playback does

not begin automatically.

Notes:

• If the DVD/VCR is connected to a HDTV using HDMI, you

can display the HD resolution JPEG images (720p or

1080i). See “HD Jpeg” on page .

• During JPEG playback, you cannot use Jump and A-B

Repeat functions.

TOP MENU

DVD MENU

ENTER

ANGLE

PLAY

STOP

PAUSE/STILL

Picture-01

Picture-02

Picture-03

Picture-04

Picture-05

Picture-06

Picture-07

Picture-08

JPEG Preview

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

W: 2048 H: 1536

/Picture-01.JPG

ZOOM

SKIP

C/D/B/A

Advanced playback (DVD)

▲/▼

ENTER

PLAY

STOP

MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX

and Audio

CD operation (Continued)

Press C/D to select desired DivX® file.

Press ENTER or PLAY. The selected DivX®

movie will be played back on the screen.

Press STOP to end playback.

The file browser appears on the

screen. If you want to watch the

other file, repeat steps 1 ~ 2.

When PLAY has been pressed after displaying

the file browser, playback begins automatically

starting from the first file. In this case, if the first

file is a JPEG file, the first JPEG file is played

back. If the first file is a DivX® file, the first DivX®

file is played back. If the first file is an MP3/WMA

file, only MP3/WMA file are played back in order.

If there is no file at a root directory, playback does

not begin automatically.

DivX® playback Playing DivX® VOD content

DivX® VOD content is protected by DRM (Digital Rights

Management) system. This restricts playback of content to

specific registered devices.

If the incorrect DRM file is

loaded, “Authorization

Error This player is not

authorized to play this

video.” will appear on the

screen.

When you attempt to play

DivX® VOD, the number of

plays is limited and the right message will appear on

the screen. If you wish to play it, select “YES”.

• If the number of plays goes over the limit, then

“Rental Expired” will be displayed, in this case the

file will not be played.

Notes:

• In order to play DivX® VOD content on this unit, you first need

to register the unit with registration code. See page

• This unit cannot playback the DivX® VOD content on the USB

Mass Storage.

Advanced playback (DVD)

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3 3

Select Files

Repeat :Track

Mode :Off

Repeat playback (CD/USB)

In the file browser, press B/A or C/D to select

“Repeat” during stop mode.

Press ENTER to select “Track” or “All”.

Press PLAY.

The unit automatically starts repeat

playback after finishing the current

track.

Random playback (CD/USB)

To resume normal playback

Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.

In the file browser, press B/A or C/D to select

“Mode” during stop mode.

Press ENTER to select “Random”.

Press PLAY.

The Random playback will start.

To resume normal playback

Select Mode : “Off” in step 2.

Notes:

• The program is canceled when you open the disc tray or

turn the power off.

• In case of Audio CD, the function of A-B Repeat can be

used. See “A-B Repeat playback” .

• Track repeat function is canceled whenever SKIP or

is pressed.

ENTER

▲/▼//

PLAY

SKIP /

Advanced playback (DVD)

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3 3

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

Edit Mode

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-1

WMA 2

JPEG Previe

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

Edit Mode

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-1

WMA-2

JPEG Preview

Edit Mode

Program View

Add To Program

In the file browser, press B/A or C/D to select

“Edit Mode”, then press ENTER.

When “Edit Mode” is black color,

you can mark the files which you

want to add into Program list.

Press B/A or C/D to select the file you want to

add into the program list.

Press ENTER. Selected file was

marked.

Repeat this procedure to select the

other files.

Press B/A or C/D to select “Add To Program”.

Then press ENTER. All marked files are added

into the program list.

•When you finish storing all the files

you want into the Program list,

select “Edit Mode” again and press

ENTER to release edit mode.

Program playback (CD/USB)

Press C/D to select “Program View”, then

press ENTER. Program View shows only the

programed files that you have added in Step 2.

Program View

In the Program View, press PLAY. The files

start to playback in programmed order that

were added by you.

To remove file from program list

In the Edit Mode, switch to Program View. Select the files

you want to remove, then press ENTER. Select “Clear

Program” and press ENTER. Marked file is removed

from program list.

ENTER

▲/▼//

PLAY

MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX

and Audio

CD operation (Continued)

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-1

WMA-2

WMA-3

JPEG Preview

Edit Mode

Program View

Add To Program

Browser View

Function setup (DVD)

ENTER

C/D/B/A

SETUP

RETURN

Setting procedure

DVD

VCD

Customizing the function settings

You can change the default settings to customize performance

to your preference.

Press SETUP during stop mode.

The following on-screen display

appears.

To clear SETUP screen, press SETUP or

RETURN.

Press C or D to select the desired section, then

press B or A.

First option will be highlighted. Press C or D

to select the desired option.

Then press A or ENTER. The selectable

settings will appear.

Parental : Off

Set Password

Output : Interlace

DivX(R) VOD

DRC : Off

QSound : On

E.B.L. : Off

TV Screen : 4:3

Display : On

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On

Menu : English

Subtitle : English

Audio : English

Parental : Off

Set Password

Output : Interlace

DivX(R) VOD

DRC : Off

QSound : On

Menu : English

Subtitle : English

Audio : English

E.B.L. : Off

TV Screen : On

Display : On

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : Off

Screen Saver : On

•Repeat steps 3 ~ 5 to change

other option.

•To select another section, go

back to step 2 by pressing B

repeatedly.

Change the selection using C or D, by referring

to the corresponding pages ~

Press ENTER to save the setting.

Parental : Off

Set Password

Output : Interlace

DivX(R) VOD

DRC : Off

QSound : On

Menu : English

Subtitle : English

Audio : English

E.B.L. : Off

TV Screen : 4:3

Display : On

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : Off

Screen Saver : On

Parental : Off

Set Password

Output : Interlace

DivX(R) VOD

DRC : Off

QSound : On

Menu : English

Subtitle : English

Audio : English

E.B.L. : Off

TV Screen : 4:3

Display : On

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : Off

Screen Saver : On

Function setup (DVD)

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

Section Option

Subtitle

Audio

E.B.L.

TV Screen

Display

Picture Mode

JPEG Interval

Screen Saver

DRC

QSound

Digital Out

Parental

Password

HD Jpeg

Output

DivX(R) VOD

Details

To select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and

“Audio” if more than one language are available on

the disc.

To select On or Off for E.B.L. (Enhanced Black

Level).

To select a picture size according to the aspect

ratio of your TV.

To turn on or de-activate the operational status dis-

play on the screen.

To select a preferred picture mode from “Video”,

“Film” or “Auto”.

To select a preferred setting for the slide show play-

back.

To select On or Off for Screen Saver function.

To select On or Off for DRC (Dynamic Range Con-

trol).

To select On or Off for QSound.

To select an output sound format corresponding to

your system connection.

To select a preferred parental level for the parental

setting.

Input 4-digit password to set the parental level.

To select On or Off for HD Jpeg mode.

To select a preferred video output signal from “Inter-

lace” or “Progressive”.

To display your 8-character registration code.

Page

Setting details

Function setup (DVD)

Menu, Subtitle, Audio

You can select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and

“Audio” if more than one languages are recorded onto

the disc.

English, Francais, Espanol:

The selected language will be heard or seen.

Other:

Other language can be selected (see the

“Language code list”

Original: (Audio)

The unit will select the first priority language of

each disc.

Off: (Subtitle)

Subtitles do not appear.

Notes:

• If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the

first-priority language is selected.

• If you want to change the OSD language, you can perform

it by VCR MENU .

E.B.L.

To select the black level of playback pictures, set your

preference and monitor’s ability.

Off: Standard grey scale (7.5 IRE cut off)

On: Enhanced grey scale (0 IRE cut off)

TV Screen

You have the following screen sizes to choose from:

4:3 (Letter box):

Select this mode when connecting to a conven-

tional TV. When playing back a wide screen-DVD

disc, it displays the wide picture with black bands

at the top and bottom of screen.

4:3 (Pan scan):

It displays the wide picture on the whole screen

with left and right edges automatically cut off.

16:9 (Wide):

Select this mode when connecting to a wide-

screen TV. A wide screen picture is displayed full

size.

Note:

If the DVD disc is not formatted in the pan & scan style, it

displays 4:3 style.

Parental : Off

Set Password

Output : Interlace

DivX(R) VOD

DRC : Off

QSound : On

E.B.L. : Off

TV Screen : 4:3

Display : On

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On

Menu : English

Subtitle : English

Audio : English

Parental : Off

Set Password

Output : Interlace

DivX(R) VOD

DRC : Off

QSound : On

Menu : English

Subtitle : English

Audio : English

E.B.L. : Off

TV Screen : 4:3

Display : On

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : Off

Screen Saver : On

Function setup (DVD)

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

JPEG Interval

You can continuously playback all JPEG files

automatically.

After the selection below, the disc will start playback on

which JPEG files have been recorded.

Off:

Plays back one file at a time.

5 Seconds:

Plays back images in the form of a slide show at

5 second intervals.

10 Seconds:

Plays back images in the form of a slide show at

10 second intervals.

15 Seconds:

Plays back images in the form of a slide show at

15 second intervals.

Picture Mode

There are two types of source content in pictures

recorded in DVD video discs: film content (pictures

recorded from films at 24 frames per second) and

video content (video signals recorded at 30 frames per

second). Make this selection according to the type of

content being viewed.

Auto: Select this position normally.

The DVD player automatically detects

source content, film or video, of

playback source, and converts that

signal in the progressive output format

in an appropriate method.

Film: The DVD player converts film content

pictures in the progressive output

format appropriately. Suitable for

playback of film content pictures. The

progressive output feature will be most

effective under this selection.

Video: The DVD player filters video signal,

and converts it in the progressive

output formatappropriately.

Suitable for playback of video content

pictures.

Note:

Depending on the disc, pictures may be cut off or

doubled. In this case, select “Video”.

Display

On screen display can be switched on or off when you

press the buttons.

Off: On screen displays do not appear when you

press any buttons.

On: On screen displays appear when you press

the buttons (factory setting).

Screen Saver

The screen saver operates when you leave the unit

in DVD stop mode for approx. five minutes.

The screen will repeatedly get dark gradually and

back to normal.

Off:

Screen Saver function is invalidated.

On:

Screen Saver function is made effective.

Setting details

Function setup (DVD)

Parental : Off

Set Password

Output : Interlace

DivX(R) VOD

Menu : English

Subtitle : English

Audio : English

E.B.L. : Off

TV Screen : 4:3

Display : On

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On

DRC : Off

QSound : Off

Digital out : PCM

QSound

This DVD video player equipped with a “QSound”. It can

produce the effect of being in a cinema or a concert hall.

Off: The QSound is disengaged.

On: The QSound operates.

Off:

It plays back at the recording level on the disc.

On:

Loud sound such as explosion or similar is toned

down slightly when played back. This makes it

suitable for when it is connected to a stereo.

Notes:

• This function works only during playback of Dolby Digital

recorded discs.

• The level of Dynamic Range Reduction may differ

depending on DVD video disc.

DRC

DRC (Dynamic Range Control) enables you to control

the dynamic range so as to achieve a suitable sound for

your equipment.

Notes:

• The QSound setting can also be changed with AUDIO

on the remote control .

• This function works only when the disc recorded with

Dolby Digital is played back.

• When this function works, the volume might changed.

• When the voice is distorted, turn off QSound.

Digital Out

Selected the output sound format corresponding to your

system connection.

PCM:

Select when connected to a 2 channel digital

stereo amplifier.

Bitstream:

Disc audio bitstream data will be output.

Notes:

•When you make a connection to a TV, or Dolby

Surround Pro Logic or stereo system via the analog

audio jacks, select “PCM” or “Bitstream”.

•If apply HDMI connection to TV, make sure to select

“PCM”, audio signal passing to TV via HDMI cable.

Function setup (DVD)

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

DRC : Off

QSound : On

Menu : English

Subtitle : English

Audio : English

E.B.L. : Off

TV Screen : 4:3

Display : On

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On

Parental : Off

Password : Change

HD Jpeg : Off

Output : Interlace

DivX(R) VOD : Display

Parental control setting

Some discs are specified not suitable for children.

Such discs can be limited not to play back with the

unit.

1) Press C or D to select “Parental”, then press

ENTER. “Enter Password” screen will appear.

2) Press “0000” using Number buttons (0–9).

(Please note, this is pre-setting password of this

unit). Then press ENTER. The parental level list will

appear.

• Level Off: The parental control setting does not

function.

• Level 8: Virtually all DVD software can be

played back.

• Level 1: DVD software for adults cannot be

played back.

3) Press C or D to select from the level 1 to level 8.

The limitation will be more severe as the level

number is lower. Then press ENTER.

4) Press OPEN/CLOSE to activate Parental control

setting.

Notes:

• Depending on the discs, the unit cannot limit

playback.

• Some discs may not be encoded with specific rating

level information though its disc jacket says “adult.” For

those discs, the age restriction will not work.

• The password is required every time when you change

the parental level.

• If you input a wrong number, press CLEAR.

Set the new password

1) Press C or D to select “Password”, then press

ENTER. “Enter Current Password” screen will

appear.

2) Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the current

password (If the password has not been set yet

after you purchase this unit, it is “0000”).

3) Then press ENTER. “Enter New Password” screen

will appear. Press Number buttons (0–9) to input

the new password.

4) Press ENTER. Now your new password has been

set. Be sure to remember this number!

If you forget the password...

1) Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.

2) Remove the disc.

3) Press OPEN/CLOSE again to close the disc tray.

“No Disc” appears on the screen.

4) While holding 7 down on the remote control and

at the same time press STOP on the front panel.

“Password Clear” appears on the screen. Now the

password has been returned to the initial value

(“0000”).

HD Jpeg

This DVD/VCR equipped with a “HD Jpeg”. It can display

the HD resolution JPEG images when the DVD/VCR is

connected to a HDTV using HDMI.

On:

Select when you connect the DVD video player to

a HDTV via HDMI OUT jack. JPEG images is dis-

played in suitable picture quality (480p, 720p or

1080i) .

Off:

The picture processing quality is fixed to 480p.

Notes:

• When the DVD/VCR is not connected to a TV using

HDMI, you cannot select “On”.

• When HD Jpeg is set to “On”, zoom function is prohibited

and component video outputs disabled when 480p, 720p

or 1080i is selected.

Setting details

Function setup (DVD)

Output

You can select the video output signal of the DVD

video player to the TV from “Interlace” or “Progres-

sive”.

Interlace:

Select when connecting to a composite TV or

a TV equipped with component video inputs

but progressive scan is not compatible.

Progressive:

Select when connecting to a TV equipped

with component video inputs and progressive

scan compatible.

Warning:

Once “Progressive” is selected when connecting to a

TV progressive scan incompatible, no image will be

seen on the video display.

In this case, you must reset the unit by pressing STOP

on the front panel for five seconds. The video output

will be restored to “Interlace” setting, and a picture will

once again be seen on a conventional analog display.

Notes:

• Some discs may not be played back with the progressive

scanning mode correctly because of the disc characteris-

tics or recording condition.

• Once Progressive scan on, S-video output is disabled.

Note:

If each setup (pages ~

) has been completed, the unit

can always be worked under the same conditions (espe-

cially with DVD discs).

Each setup will be retained in the memory even if you turn

the power off.

DivX® VOD

In order to play DivX® VOD (Video On Demand)

content on this unit, you first need to register the unit

with your DivX® VOD content provider. You do this by

generating a DivX® VOD registration code, which you

submit to your provider.

Press C or D to select “DivX(R) VOD”. Then press

ENTER. Your 8-character registration code is

displayed. Make a note of the code as you will need

it when you register with a DivX® VOD provider.

Then press ENTER to select Done.

Function setup (DVD)

Temporary disabling of rating level by DVD disc

Depending on the DVD disc, the disc may try to temporarily cancel the rating

level that you have set.

It is up to you to decide whether to cancel the rating level or not.

Load a DVD disc and press PLAY or OPEN/

CLOSE on the unit .

Note:

This temporary cancellation of rating level will be kept until the

disc is ejected.

When the disc is ejected, the original rating level will be set again

automatically.

ENTER

PLAY

0–9

OPEN/CLOSE

If the DVD disc has been designed to tempo-

rarily cancel the Rating level, the screen which

follows the “Reading” screen will change,

depending on which disc is played. If you

select “YES” with the ENTER key, password

input screen will then appear.

Enter the password with Number buttons (0–9).

Then press ENTER.

Function setup (DVD)

To exit from the entry, press

RETURN.

RETURN

Temporary disabling of rating level by DVD disc

Playback will commence if the entered

password was correct.

DVD

Others

Language code list

Enter the appropriate code number for the initial settings “Menu”, “Subtitle” and/or “Audio” .

Abkhazian 1112 Fiji 1620 Lingala 2224 Singhalese 2919

Afar 1111 Finnish 1619 Lithuanian 2230 Slovak 2921

Afrikaans 1116 French 1628 Macedonian 2321 Slovenian 2922

Albanian 2927 Frisian 1635 Malagasy 2317 Somali 2925

Amharic 1123 Galician 1722 Malay 2329 Spanish 1529

Arabic 1128 Georgian 2111 Malayalam 2322 Sundanese 2931

Armenian 1835 German 1415 Maltese 2330 Swahili 2933

Assamese 1129 Greek 1522 Maori 2319 Swedish 2932

Aymara 1135 Greenlandic 2122 Marathi 2328 Tagalog 3022

Azerbaijani 1136 Guarani 1724 Moldavian 2325 Tajik 3017

Bashkir 1211 Gujarati 1731 Mongolian 2324 Tamil 3011

Basque 1531 Hausa 1811 Nauru 2411 Tatar 3030

Bengali; Bangla 1224 Hebrew 1933 Nepali 2415 Telugu 3015

Bhutani 1436 Hindi 1819 Norwegian 2425 Thai 3018

Bihari 1218 Hungarian 1831 Oriya 2528 Tibetan 1225

Breton 1228 Icelandic 1929 Panjabi 2611 Tigrinya 3019

Bulgarian 1217 Indonesian 1924 Pashto, Pushto 2629 Tonga 3025

Burmese 2335 Interlingua 1911 Persian 1611 Turkish 3028

Byelorussian 1215 Irish 1711 Polish 2622 Turkmen 3021

Cambodian 2123 Italian 1930 Portuguese 2630 Twi 3033

Catalan 1311 Japanese 2011 Quechua 2731 Ukrainian 3121

Chinese 3618 Javanese 2033

Rhaeto-Romance

2823 Urdu 3128

Corsican 1325 Kannada 2124 Romanian 2825 Uzbek 3136

Croatian 1828 Kashmiri 2129 Russian 2831 Vietnamese 3219

Czech 1329 Kazakh 2121 Samoan 2923 Volapük 3225

Danish 1411 Kirghiz 2135 Sanskrit 2911 Welsh 1335

Dutch 2422 Korean 2125 Scots Gaelic 1714 Wolof 3325

English 1524 Kurdish 2131 Serbian 2928 Xhosa 3418

Esperanto 1525 Laothian 2225 Serbo-Croatian 2918 Yiddish 2019

Estonian 1530 Latin 2211 Shona 2924 Yoruba 3525

Faroese 1625 Latvian, Lettish 2232 Sindhi 2914 Zulu 3631

Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code

Others

Troubleshooting

Before calling a service technician, please check the following table for a possible cause of the symptoms and some solutions.

Symptoms Solutions

• Make sure the power cord is plugged in.

• Try another AC outlet.

• Unplug unit, then plug it back in.

• Select the DVD or VCR mode before operating.

DVD/VCR does not operate.

DVD/VCR

Page

–

35,47

The remote control does not function.

• Aim the remote control at the remote sensor.

• Operate within Approx. 7 Meters or reduce the light in the room.

• Clear the path of the beam.

• The batteries are weak. Replace the batteries.

• Check the batteries are inserted correctly.

DVD

No picture.

• Antenna connection is not correct or antenna cable is disconnected.

• The video channel is not in the correct position or the TV is not set to the video

channel 3 or 4.

• Check the unit is connected correctly.

• The video input selector of the TV is not set to VIDEO. Set to VIDEO (or

equivalent).

• Channel is set to the external mode.

• Press HDMI to turn off the HDMI mode.

No sound. • Check the unit is connected correctly.

• Check the input selector of the amplifier is set properly.

• The unit is in the Special playback mode.

16~19

16~26

–

16~26

–

36,49

• Select proper language in the menu options.Display is not shown in your language. 65

Playback doesn’t start. • No disc is inserted.

• The disc may be dirty. Clean up the disc.

• The unit cannot play DVD-ROMs, etc.

Stopping playback, slow-motion play, repeat

play, or memory play, etc. cannot be

performed. • Some discs may not do some of the functions.

–

No Cable TV reception. • Check all Cable TV connections.

• Station or Cable TV system problems, try another station. 18,19

Noise bars on screen.

• Tracking adjustment beyond range of automatic tracking circuit. Try Manual

tracking adjustment.

• Video heads are dirty.

• The tape is worn or damaged.

VCR

• The erase prevention tab of the video cassette is broken off.

• The unit is in the external input mode.

TV recording does not work. 34,39

Timer recording does not work. • The time is not set correctly.

• The recording start/end time is not set correctly.

• The TIMER REC has not been pressed ( is not lit).

29~31

–

No picture, or the screen is blurred or divided

into two parts.

• The PROGRESSIVE scan is “On” although the unit is connected to a TV

via the VIDEO OUT or the S-VIDEO OUT jack. 69

No subtitle. • Some discs have no subtitles.

• Subtitles are cleared. Press SUBTITLE.

Angle cannot be changed. • Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD disc.

• The function is prohibited with the unit or the disc.

“X” appears on the screen.

No 4:3 (16:9) picture. • The setup does not match your TV.

No on-screen display. • Set Display to “On”.

No surround sound. • The setup does not match your stereo system.

The unit or remote operation key is not

functioning. • Turn off the unit and unplug the AC power cord for several minutes, then replug it.

Playback does not start when the title is

selected. • Check the Parental setup.

Audio soundtrack and/or subtitle language

is not changed when you playback a DVD. • Multilingual language is not recorded on the DVD disc.

–

68,70

55,56

Others

Specifications

AC 120 V 60 Hz

Operation: 20 W, Stand by: 2 W

7.7 lbs (3.5 kg)

Width: 16-15/16 inches (430.6 mm)

Height: 3-9/16 inches (89.7 mm)

Depth: 9 inches (228.7 mm)

181 channel freq. synthesized

VHF 2-13

UHF 14-69

Cable TV 113 Channels

UHF/VHF In/Out: 75 1 coaxial

Channel 3 or 4, Switchable

NTSC

4 Rotary heads

Hi-Fi sound - 2 Tracks / MONO sound - 1 Track

20 Hz to 20 kHz

More than 90dB

Approx. 1 minute and 48 seconds (with T-120 Cassette Tape)

DVD (12 cm, 8 cm), CD (12 cm, 8 cm)

DVD: 4 Hz-22 kHz, CD: 4 Hz-20 kHz

85dB (DVD)

0.06% (DVD)

Less than 0.01% Wrms

Temperature: 5˚C-40˚C (41˚F-104˚F), Operating status: Horizontal

Power supply

Power consumption

Weight

Dimensions

Tuner

Antenna input/output

RF channel output

Color system

Video head

Audio track

Hi-Fi frequency response

Hi-Fi dynamic range

FWD/REV time at 25˚C (77˚F)

Applicable disc

Frequency range

S/N ratio

Harmonic distortion

Wow and flutter

Operating conditions

General

Input/Output

DVD/VCR

Video input 1.0 V (p-p), 75 1, negative sync., pin jack x 2

Video output 1.0 V (p-p), 75 1, negative sync., pin jack x 1

Audio input –8 dBm, 50 k1, negative sync., pin jack (L/R) x 2

Audio output –8 dBm, 1 k1, negative sync., pin jack (L/R) x 1

DVD

S-video output (Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 1, negative sync., Mini DIN 4-pin x 1

Component video output (Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 1, negative sync., pin jack x 1

(PB)/(PR) 0.7 V (p-p), 75 1, pin jack x 2

Audio output (COAXIAL DIGITAL) 0.5 V (p-p), 75 1, pin jack x 1

Audio output (ANALOG) –12 dBm, 1 k1, pin jacks (L/R) x 1

Supplied accessories

Audio/video cable ................................................. 1

Remote control (SE-R0221) ................................. 1

Batteries (R03/AAA) ............................................. 2

75 1 coaxial cable ................................................ 1

• This model complies with the above specifications.

• Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.

• This model may not be compatible with features and/or specifications that may be added in the future.

Others

- IMPORTANT -

CANADIAN WARRANTY INFORMATION

GARANTIE CANADIENNE

STANDARD WARRANTY

TYPE OF SET DVD Player

DVD/VCR Combination

Home Theatre in a Box

DVD Recorder

Portable DVD

WARRANTY PERIOD 12 MONTHS

CANADIAN WARRANTY

Toshiba of Canada Limited (TCL) makes the following

limited warranties to original consumers in Canada.

Please retain your “Bill of Sale” as proof of purchase.

To obtain a “Canadian Warranty” please register

online at www.toshiba.ca.

Canadian Warranty Information

Should service be required on this unit during the one year

warranty period, TCL's option will be to repair or exchange the

defective unit. It will be necessary to follow this procedure:

Contact: Toshiba of Canada Limited at the Consumer

Electronics Group, customer support line.

Phone: 1-800-268-3404

Email: ceg_customer_support@toshiba.ca

All in-warranty repairs must be made by an authorized TCL

service centre.

For service exchange TCL will arrange to have the unit picked

up by courier and a replacement unit will be returned via same

courier. (Note: A major credit card number will be required as a

charge of $25.00 will apply if no fault is found with the unit.)

During the first 3 months of ownership, a new unit will be sup-

plied as a replacement. During the remainder of the warranty

period a service-renewed unit will be supplied.

The original “Bill of Sale” must be provided as proof of pur-

chase (it will be returned with the replacement unit.)

This 12-month warranty will be strictly adhered to.

Out of warranty units should be repaired by a TCL authorized

service centre.

Note: It is the responsibility of the owner to ensure proper

packaging. Should damage in shipping occur, due to poor

packaging, a charge back for the repair will result.

This warranty applies to the original purchaser only and is not

transferable.

This warranty does not apply to sets that have been subjected

to misuse, neglect, accident, physical damage or acts of

nature.

Sets with the serial number removed, altered, replaced or

defaced will not be covered by this warranty.

The warranties from TCL are effective only if the product is

purchased in Canada from an authorized TCL dealer and

operated in Canada.

Products utilized for rental or commercial purposes are not

covered by this warranty.

This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, guaranties or

agreements, whether expressed or implied, and no person,

agent distributor, dealer, service centre or company is author-

ized to change, modify or extend its terms in any manner

whatsoever.

GARANTIE NORMALE

TYPE D’APPAREIL Lecteur DVD

DVD/magnétoscope combo

Cinéma maison dans une boîte

Enregistreur DVD

DVD Portatif

DURÉE DE LA GARANTIE: 12 MOIS

GARANTIE CANADIENNE

1) Toshiba du Canada Limitée (TCL) offre au Canada les

garanties limitées suivantes aux consommateurs origin-

aux. Veuillez conserver votre « facture » comme preuve

d’achat. Pour obtenir une garantie canadienne,

veuillez vous inscrire en ligne à www.toshiba.ca

Information sur la garantie Canadienne

Si vous avez besoin de service sur cet appareil au cours le

l'année de garantie, Toshiba du Canada Limitée aura l'option

de réparer ou échanger l'appareil défectueux. Vous devrez

suivre la procédure suivante:

Contact: Toshiba du Canada Limitée au Groupe Électronique

aux consommateurs, service à la clientèle.

Tél: 1-800-268-3404

Courriel: ceg_customer_support@toshiba.ca

Toutes les réparations au cours de la garantie doivent être faites

par un centre de service autorisé Toshiba.

Pour un échange TCL s'assurera qu'un service de courrier

ramassera l'unité et qu'un appareil de remplacement soit

expédié par le même service de courrier.

(Note: Un numéro de carte de crédit sera requis car une

charge de 25,00$ sera appliquée si toutefois l’appareil n’avait

aucun problème de fonctionnement.)

Une nouvelle unité sera fournie comme remplacement durant

les premiers 3 mois de propriété. Par contre durant la balance

de la garantie une unité remise à neuf sera fournie.

La «facture originale doit être fournie comme preuve d’achat

(elle vous sera retournée avec l’unité de remplacement.)

Cette garantie de 12 mois sera strictement adhérée.

Les unités hors de garantie devraient être réparées par un

centre de service autorisé Toshiba.

Note: C’est la responsabilité du propriétaire de s’assurer que

l’emballage est adéquat. Vous serez facturé pour toutes répa-

rations causées par des dommages encourus à cause d’un

emballage non adéquat.

Cette garantie est octroyée à l’acheteur initial et n’est pas

transférable. Cette garantie ne s’aplique pas aux appareils qui

ont été sujets aux abus, négligences, accidents, dommages

physiques ou actes naturels.

Les appareils dont le numéro de série a été enlevé, altéré,

remplacé ou barbouillé ne sont pas couverts par cette

garantie.

Les garanties de TCL sont valides seulement sur les unités

sont achetées et utilisées au Canada d'un marchand autorisé

TCL.

Cette garantie ne couvre pas les produits de location ou à

usage commercial. Cette garantie remplace toutes autres

garanties ou ententes exprimées ou sous-entendues. Aucune

personne, agent, distributeur, concessionaire ou compagnie

n’est autorisé à changer, modifier ou prolonger les termes de

cette garantie de quelque façon que ce soit.

Toshiba of Canada Limited 191 McNabb Street Markham, Ontario L3R 8H2

Others

Memo

...................................................................................................................................

A1-1

CAUTION

THIS DIGITAL VIDEO PLAYER EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.

TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ THIS SERVICE MANUAL CARE-

FULLY AND RETAIN FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE MAINTENANCE,

CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE LOCATION-SEE SERVICE PROCEDURE.

USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN

THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.

TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, DO NOT TRY TO OPEN THE ENCLOSURE.

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED. DO NOT

STARE INTO BEAM.

Location of the required Marking

The rating sheet and the safety caution are on the rear of the unit.

CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION PERFORMANCE

STANDARDS, 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.

PREPARATION OF SERVICING

The laser diode used for a pickup head may be destroyed with external static electricity.

Moreover, even if it is operating normally after repair, when static electricity discharge is received at the

time of repair, the life of the product may be shortened.

Please perform the following measure against static electricity, be careful of destruction of a laser diode

at the time of repair.

• Place the unit on a workstation equipped to protect against static electricity, such as conductive mat.

• Soldering iron with ground wire or ceramic type is used.

• A worker needs to use a ground conductive wrist strap for body.

A1-2

IMPORTANT SERVICE SAFETY INFORMATION

Safety precautions to be followed during servicing:

Parts marked with an are critical parts for safety. Replace only with the one described in the parts

list.

Before returning the DVD product to the customer, make the appropriate leakage current check or

resistance measurements to ensure that exposed parts are properly insulated from the supply circuit.

A leakage current check is recommended for this unit. Plug the AC line cord directly into a 120V 60Hz AC

outlet (do not use an isolation transformer for this check). Use a leakage current tester (Fig. 1) or a

metering system which complies with Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1492). Measure for current from all

exposed metal parts of the cabinet to a known earth ground: particularly, any exposed metal part having a

return path to the chassis. Any current measured must not exceed 0.5mA. Any measurement not within

the limits outlined above are indicative of a potential shock hazard and corrective action must be taken

before returning the unit to the customer.

KNOWN EARTH

GROUND

1.5K ohm

0.15 µF

(Reading should not be above 0.5mA)

Leakage Current Tester

TEST PROBE

Test all exposed

metal surfaces

PRODUCT UNDER TEST

2-Blade polarized

type cord set

Fig. 1 AC Leakage Test

A1-3

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

8A.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

READ INSTRUCTIONS

All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated.

RETAIN INSTRUCTIONS

The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.

HEED WARNINGS

All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.

FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS

All operating and use instructions should be followed.

CLEANING

Unplug this unit from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp

cloth for cleaning.

ATTACHMENTS

Do not use attachments not recommended by the unit’s manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

WATER AND MOISTURE

Do not use this unit near water. For example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet

basement, or near a swimming pool.

ACCESSORIES

Do not place this unit on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The

unit may fall, causing serious injury, and serious damage to the unit. Use only

with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer.

An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops,

excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart

combination to overturn.

VENTILATION

Slots and openings in the cabinet and in the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to ensure reliable

operation of the unit, and to protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. The

openings should never be blocked by placing the unit on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This unit

should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat source. This unit should not be placed in a built-in

installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions

have been adhered to.

POWER SOURCES

This unit should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the rating plate. If you are not sure

of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company. For units

intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.

GROUNDING OR POLARIZATION

This unit is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other).

This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug

fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your

obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. If your unit is equipped with a 3-wire

grounding-type plug, a plug having a third (grounding) pin, this plug will only fit into a grounding-type power

outlet. This too, is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to

replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding-type plug.

POWER-CORD PROTECTION

Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon

or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they

exit from the appliance.

LIGHTNING

To protect your unit from a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time,

unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the unit

due to lightning and power line surges.

POWER LINES

An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or

power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system,

extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits, as contact with them might be

fatal.

OVERLOADING

Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.

OBJECT AND LIQUID ENTRY

Do not push objects through any openings in this unit, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out

parts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill or spray any type of liquid into the unit.

PORTABLE CART WARNING

(symbol provided by RETAC)

S3125A

A1-4

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS (CONTINUED)

OUTDOOR ANTENNA GROUNDING

If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the unit, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded

so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Section 810 of the National

Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting

structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of

antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

SERVICING

Do not attempt to service this unit yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage

or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

DAMAGE REQUIRING SERVICE

Unplug this unit from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following

conditions:

REPLACEMENT PARTS

When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician uses replacement parts specified by the

manufacturer or those that have the same characteristics as the original parts.

Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.

SAFETY CHECK

Upon completion of any service or repairs to this unit, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to

determine that the unit is in proper operating condition.

WALL OR CEILING MOUNTING

The product should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.

HEAT

The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

DISC TRAY

Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray as it is closing. It may cause serious personal injury.

CONNECTING

When you connect the product to other equipment, turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the

wall outlet. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock and serious personal injury. Read the owner's manual of

the other equipment carefully and follow the instructions when making any connections.

SOUND VOLUME

Reduce the volume to the minimum level before you turn on the product. Otherwise, sudden high volume sound

may cause hearing or speaker damage.

SOUND DISTORTION

Do not allow the product output distorted sound for a longtime. It may cause speaker overheating and fire.

HEADPHONES

When you use the headphones, keep the volume at a moderate level. If you use the headphones continuously

with high volume sound, it may cause hearing damage.

LASER BEAM

Do not look into the opening of the disc tray or ventilation opening of the product to see the source of the laser

beam. It may cause sight damage.

DISC

Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc. These discs are easily broken and may cause serious

personal injury and product malfunction.

NOTE TO CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides

guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the

grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.

If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the unit.

If the unit has been exposed to rain or water.

If the unit does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that

are covered by the operating instructions, as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the unit to its normal

operation.

If the unit has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.

When the unit exhibits a distinct change in performance, this indicates a need for service.

A1-5

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810-20)

ANTENNA LEAD

IN WIRE

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810-21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250, PART H)

GROUND

CLAMP

ELECTRIC SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC-NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

S2898A

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS (CONTINUED)

A1-6

Before removing Pick Up PCB and DVD PCB connector, the short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1

using a soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no soldering, the Laser may be damaged.

WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK

[ When removing the DVD Deck ]

[ When installing the DVD Deck ]

Remove all the soldering on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up PCB and DVD

PCB connector.

NOTE

Fig. 1

Before your operation, please read “PREPARATION OF SERVICING”.

Use the Lead Free solder.

Manual soldering conditions

• Soldering temperature: 350 ± 5˚C

• Soldering time: Within 2 seconds

• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu

When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the draw in equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the

Flux smoke away from it.

•

Short circuit using a

soldering iron.

Pick Up PCB

A1-7

TAPE REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

Remove the Top Cabinet, Front Cabinet and DVD Block. (Refer to item 1 of the

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.)

Remove the screw 1 of the Deck Chassis and remove the Loading Motor. (Refer to Fig. 2)

Rotate the Pinch Roller Cam in the direction of the arrow by hand to slacken the Video Tape.

Rotate the Clutch Ass'y either derection to wind the Video Tape in the Cassette Case.

Repeat steps 3~4. Then take out the Video Cassette from the Deck Chassis. Be careful not to scratch the

tape.

Main Cam Clutch Ass'y

Main Chassis (Front Side)

Loading Motor

Capstan DD Unit

Pinch Roller Cam

Screw 1

Remove the Top and Front Cabinet. (Refer to item 1 of the DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.)

Rotate the Main Gear in the direction of the arrow by hand.

(Refer to Fig. 1)

Manually open the Tray.

DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY

Fig. 1

DVD DeckMain Gear

A1-8

TRAY LOCK

PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL

4 DIGIT PASSWORD CANCELLATION

If the stored 4 digit password in the Rating Level menu needs to be cancelled, please follow the steps below.

Turn Unit ON.

Set the DVD Mode.

Confirm that the 'No Disc' will be appeared on the screen.

Press and hold the '7' key on the remote control unit.

Simultaneously press and hold the 'STOP' key on the front panel.

Hold both keys for more than 3 seconds.

The On Screen Display message 'PASSWORD CLEAR' will appear.

The 4 digit password has now been cleared

Turn Unit ON.

Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.

Press it in order of 'SETUP', 'SUBTITLE', '3', 'AUDIO' and '0' key of a remote control unit.

The On Screen Display message ' ' will appear.

The Tray Lock has now been set up.

Tray cannot be opened by setting the Tray Lock, please follow the steps below.

To unlock the Tray Lock, please follow the steps below.

Turn Unit ON.

Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.

Press it in order of 'SETUP', 'SUBTITLE', '3', 'AUDIO' and '0' key of a remote control unit.

The On Screen Display message ' ' will appear.

The Tray Lock has now been cleared.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

• GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT

• LEAD-FREE SOLDER

• OWNER'S MANUAL

CAUTION ....................................................................................................................................

PREPARATION OF SERVICING ...............................................................................................

IMPORTANT SERVICE SAFETY INFORMATION ...................................................................

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS .....................................................................................................

WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK ...............................................................................................

TAPE REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY ............................................................

DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY .............................................................

PARENTAL CONTROL-RATING LEVEL ..................................................................................

TRAY LOCK ................................................................................................................................

TABLE OF CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1.REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS AND P. C. BOARDS..............................................

2.REMOVAL OF VCR DECK PARTS .....................................................................................

3.REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS .....................................................................................

4.REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT PACKAGE IC .................................................

KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS ........................................................................................................

SERVICE MODE LIST ................................................................................................................

PREVENTIVE CHECKS AND SERVICE INTERVALS ..............................................................

RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE ............................................................................................

WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC ..........................................................................

RF SIGNAL CHECK OF DVD MT PCB .....................................................................................

SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS .......................................................................................

PREPARATION FOR SERVICING.............................................................................................

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................................................

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS..................................................................................................

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ...................................................................................................

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

DVD..........................................................................................................................................

VCR..........................................................................................................................................

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

DVD MT/USB ...........................................................................................................................

VCR MT/OPERATION/OPERATION 2 ...................................................................................

LOADING MOTOR/SW ...........................................................................................................

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP .................................................................................................

MEMORY .................................................................................................................................

MOTOR DRIVE .......................................................................................................................

AUDIO/VIDEO .........................................................................................................................

HDMI/USB ...............................................................................................................................

Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP .................................................................................................

SYSCON ..................................................................................................................................

TUNER/JACK ..........................................................................................................................

OPERATION/DISPLAY ...........................................................................................................

Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR ............................................................................................................

POWER ...................................................................................................................................

OPERATION/LED....................................................................................................................

LOADING MOTOR/SW ...........................................................................................................

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ...............................................................................................

WAVEFORMS .............................................................................................................................

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW .............................................................................................

CHASSIS EXPLODED VIEW .....................................................................................................

DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW...................................................................................................

MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST .........................................................................

CHASSIS REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST..................................................................................

DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ...............................................................................

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ...........................................................................

A1-1

A1-2

A1-3~A1-5

A1-6

A1-7

A1-8

A2-1

A3-1~A3-5

B1-1, B1-2

B2-1~B2-6

B3-1~B3-4

B4-1, B4-2

C1-1, C1-2

C2-1

C3-1, C3-2

C4-1

C4-2

C4-3

D1-1

D2-1~D2-4

D3-1, D3-2

E-1~E-34

F-1, F-2

F-3, F-4

G-1,G-2

G-3~G-6

G-7, G-8

H-1, H-2

H-3, H-4

H-5, H-6

H-7, H-8

H-9, H-10

H-11, H-12

H-13, H-14

H-15, H-16

H-17, H-18

H-19, H-20

H-21, H-22

H-23, H-24

H-25, H-26

H-27, H-28

I-1, I-2

J1-1, J1-2

J2-1, J2-2

J3-1

K1-1

K2-1

K3-1

K4-1~K4-5

A2-1

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-1 Outline of the product DVD VIDEO PLAYER & VHS Player / Recorder

G-2 DVD System Color System NTSC

Disc

Disc Diameter 120 mm , 80 mm

Drive DM3SA

Search speed Fwd 4 steps

Actual 2-120 times (DVD, VIDEO CD, SVCD)

4-40 times (CD)

Rev 4 steps

Actual 2-120 times (DVD, VIDEO CD, SVCD)

4-40 times (CD)

Slow speed Fwd 1/7-1/2 times

Actual --

Rev --

Actual --

G-3 VCR System VHS Player / Recorder

System Video System NTSC

Hi-Fi STEREO Yes

NTSC PB(PAL60Hz) No

Deck OVD-7S

Heads Video Head 4Head

FM Audio Head 2Head

Audio / Control Mono/Yes

Erase (Full Track Erase) Yes

Erase (Normal Audio Track Erase) No

Tape Rec PAL -

Speed NTSC SP/SLP(EP)

Play PAL -

NTSC SP/SLP(EP)

Fast Forward / Rewind Time (Approx.) at 25oC FF:1'48"/REW:1'48"

with Cassette T-120

Forward/Reverse NTSC or PAL-M SP/LP/SLP(EP) = 3x,5x / 7x,9x / 9x,15x

Picture Search PAL or SECAM -

Frame Advance Yes

Slow Speed 1/10

G-4 Tuning Broadcasting System US System M

System Tuner and System 1Tuner

Receive CH Destination US (w/CABLE)

CH Coverage 2-69,4A,A-5~ A-1,A~I,

J~ W, W+1-W+84

Intermediate Picture (FP) 45.75 MHz

Frequency Sound (FS) 41.25 MHz

FP-FS 4.50 MHz

Preset CH -

RF Converter Output Yes

Channel 3 or 4 ch

Level / Impedance 66 dBu / 75 Ohm

Sound Selector No

Stereo / Dual TV Sound US-ST

Tuner Sound Muting Yes

G-5 Power Power Source AC 120V 60Hz

DC -

Power Consumption 20 W at 120V 60Hz

Stand by 2 W at 120V 60Hz

Per Year -- W

Energy Star No

Protector Power Fuse Yes

Safety Circuit Yes

IC Protector(Micro Fuse) No

G-6 Regulation Safety UL / CSA

Radiation FCC / IC

Laser DHHS

G-7 Temperature Operation 5oC - 40oC

Storage -20oC - 60oC

G-8 Operating Humidity Less than 80% RH

DVD, CD-DA, CD-R/RW, VIDEO CD,

SVCD, DVD-R/RW (VIDEO FORMAT ONLY)

A3-1

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-9 Signal Video Signal Output Level 1 V p-p/75 ohm (DVD,VCR)

S/N Ratio (Weighted) 65 dB(DVD) 50 dB(VCR)

Horizontal Resolution 500 Lines (DVD) 230 Lines(VCR Mode)

RGB Signal Output Level -

Audio Signal Input Level Microphone -

Input Level Line -8 dBm/ 50k ohm (VCR, 0dBm=0.775Vrms)

Output Level Line

Digital Output Level 0.5 V p-p / 75 ohm(DVD)

S/N Ratio at (Weighted) 85dB(DVD), 42dB(VCR at SP)

Harmonic Distortion (1KHz) Typical 0.06% (1KHz) (DVD) , 1.5% (1KHz) (VCR)

Frequency Response : DVD Mode at DVD 4 Hz - 22 KHz

DVD Mode at VIDEO CD/SVCD 4 Hz - 20 KHz

DVD Mode at CD 4 Hz - 20 KHz

VCR Mode at SP 100Hz - 10 KHz

VCR Mode at LP -

VCR Mode at SLP 100Hz - 4 KHz

Hi-Fi Audio Signal Dynamic Range : More than 90dB

Frequency Response 20Hz ~20kHz

Wow And Flutter : Less than 0.01 %Wrms

Channel Separation : More than 60 dB

Harmonic Distortion : Less than 0.01

G-10 OSD Language English / French / Spanish

G-11 Clock,Timer Calendar 1990/1/1 ~ 2081/12/31

and Timer Timer Events 8 Program/ 1 Month

Back-up One Touch Recording Max Time 6 Hours

Timer Back-up (at Power Off Mode) 5sec

G-12 Display DISPLAY Yes

DISPLAY type LED Module (Green, "Rec" &Timer symbol = Red)

Clock/Counter,CH,Timer Rec,

OTR,Play,Rec,FF(Cue),Rew(Rev),

Stop,ATR,Eject

VCR Yes

DVD Yes

CD Yes

Clock Yes (12h)

AM No

PM Yes

Counter VCR Yes (hour:min)

DVD Yes (hour:min)

CD Yes (min:sec)

Eject Yes

Counter Remain No

Play Yes

Stop No

Rec Yes

FF / Cue No

REW / Review No

Pause / Still Yes

OTR (ITR) No

T-Rec Yes

Chapter No

TITLE No

TRACK Yes

Repeat No

Hi-Fi No

SP No

LP No

SLP No

CH Yes

RF Output CH Yes

Tape In Yes

Remocon Custom Code No

Progressive Scan Out Yes

-8 dBm/ 1k ohm (VCR, 0dBm=0.775Vrms)

-12dBm/ 1k ohm (DVD, -20dBFs 0dBFs=2.0Vrms)

A3-2

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-13 Remote Unit RC-LM

Control Glow in Dark Remocon Yes

Remocon Format TOSHIBA

Format TOSHIBA

Custom Code 45-BA

Power Source Voltage(D.C) 3V

UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs

Total Keys 56 Key

Keys DVD/VCR Yes

TV Yes

CABLE BOX Yes

Power Yes

1 Yes

2 Yes

3 Yes

4 Yes

5 Yes

6 Yes

7 Yes

8 Yes

9 Yes

0 Yes

DISPLAY/CALL Yes

100 Yes

JUMP/ZERO RETURN Yes

ZOOM/CM SKIP Yes

CH+ Yes

CH- Yes

Vol.+ Yes

Vol.- Yes

Input Select Yes

Input Select / PROGRESSIVE No

PROGRAM Yes

TITLE (TOP MENU) Yes

DVD MENU(MENU) Yes

UP/ SET+ / TRACKING+ Yes

DOWN/ SET- / TRACKING- Yes

LEFT/CH- Yes

RIGHT/CH+ Yes

SELECT/ENTER Yes

CLEAR/CANCEL Yes

RETURN Yes

PAUSE/STILL/STEP Yes

PLAY Yes

STOP Yes

SKIP- / INDEX- Yes

REW(Review)/SEARCH- Yes

FF(Cue)/SEARCH+ Yes

SKIP+ / INDEX+ Yes

SETUP MENU/VCR MENU Yes

MARKER Yes

CLOCK / COUNTER Yes

SLOW (Forward) Yes

ANGLE/COUNTER RESET Yes

SUBTITLE/ATR Yes

AUDIO / AUDIO SELECT Yes

HDMI Yes

PLAY MODE/SPEED Yes

REPEAT A-B/ DVD/USB Yes

TV/VCR Yes

DVD/VCR SELECT Yes

EJECT Yes

OPEN/CLOSE Yes

T-REC Yes

REC/OTR Yes

A3-3

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-14 Features Auto Power Off No

(DVD) Video CD Playback Yes

SVCD Playback Yes

MP3 Playback Yes

WMA Playback Yes

JPEG Playback Yes

DivX Play back Yes

1 DMF Support No

Progressive Scan Out Yes

HD JPEG Yes

HDMI Out Yes

USB Yes (Some USB devices may not be usable.)

Card slot No

Digital Out Dolby Digital Yes

MPEG Yes

PCM Yes

DTS Yes

Down Mix Out (Dolby Digital) Yes

(DTS) No

Surround Q Sound

E.B.L.

(

Enhanced Black Level

)

Yes

Screen Saver Yes

Tray Lock Yes

Auto Stop No

Audio DAC 192kHz / 24bit

Closed Caption signal in VBI (DVD Playback) Yes

Features Auto Head Cleaning No

(VCR) Auto Power Off No

Forward/Reverse Picture Search Yes

VIDEO PLUS+ (SHOWVIEW, G-CODE) No

CH Set-Up Add/Delete Yes

One Touch Playback No

Clock Set Yes (Calendar 12H)

Auto CH Memory Yes

AREA CODE No

Auto Clock Set Yes

Index Search Yes

SQPB Yes

CATV Yes

MTS (SAP) Yes

CM Skip (30sec x 6 Times) Yes

Copy (Disc to Tape) Yes (by Conditioning)

G-15 Accessories Owner's Manual Language English / French

w/Guarantee Card Yes

Remote Control Unit Yes

Guarantee Card No

Registration Card No

Warning Sheet No

Service Station List No

Important Tag No

AC Plug Adapter No

Quick Set-up Sheet No

Battery Yes

UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs

AC Cord No

AV Cord (1.2m) Yes

75 Ohm Coaxial Cable (Single Shield) Yes (0.9m)

HDMI Cable No

S-Video Cable No

21pin cable No

800 No Sticker No

Toll Free Insert Sheet No

Safety Tip No

Information Sheet (Return) Yes

Netflix Card No

PVC Warning Sheet No

A3-4

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-16 Interface Switch Front Power Yes

Play Yes

Eject (VCR) Yes

Stop Yes

Rec/OTR Yes

Open/Close (DVD) Yes

CH + Yes

CH - Yes

FF/ Search(>>) Yes

Rew/Search(<<) Yes

Still/Pause No

Shuttle (Search/REV/FWD) No

DVD/VCR Yes

Main Power SW No

Rear Attenuator No

S-Video/Component Video Selector No

RF Out (Slide SW) No

Main Power SW No

Terminals Front Video In RCA x 1 (Black/Silver)

Audio In RCA x 2 (L/MONO,R Black/Silver)

USB Yes

Rear Video Output RCA x1 (Yellow)

S-Video x 1 (DVD Signal Only)

Component x1 (RCA 3pin, DVD Signal Only)

Audio Output RCA x 4(L,R White,Red)

Coaxial x 1 (Digital Audio, DVD Signal Only)

Optical Out (Option) Yes

Video Input (Option) RCA x 1 (Yellow)

Audio Input (Option) RCA x 2 (L/MONO,R White,Red)

RF Input / Output Yes

Euro Scart No

HDMI Output Yes

AC Inlet No

Indicator LED Power No

Rec No

T-Rec No

TV/VCR No

DVD Yes (GREEN)

VCR Yes (GREEN)

Surround No

Level Meter No

G-17 Set Size Approx. W x D x H (mm) 430.6 x 228.7 x 89.7

G-18 Weight Net (Approx.) 3.5 kg( 7.7lbs)

Gross (Approx.) 4.5 kg( 9.9lbs)

G-19 Carton Master Carton No

Content --- Sets

Material --- / ---

Dimensions W x D x H(mm) ---

Description of Origin ---

Gift Box Material Double / White

W/Color Photo Label No

Dimensions W x D x H(mm) 497 x 340 x 174

Description of Origin Yes

Drop Test

Height (cm) 80 cm

Container Stuffing 2,015 Sets/40' container

G-20 Material Cabinet Front PS 94V2 or More / DECABROM

PCB Non-Halogen Demand No

Eyelet Demand No

G-21 Environment Environmental standard requirement (by buyer) Green procurement of TOSHIBA

Pb-free Phase3(Phase3A)

Measures for Whisker Yes

Natural Dropping At 1 Corner / 3 Edges / 6

Surfaces

A3-5

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

B1-1

1. REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS

AND P.C. BOARDS

Open Flap to 90˚ and flex in direction of arrow (A), at the

same time slide in direction of arrow (B).

Then lift in direction of arrow (C).

1-2: FLAP (Refer to Fig. 1-2)

Fig. 1-2

(A)

Flap

(B)

(C)

1-1: TOP CABINET/FRONT CABINET/OPERATION PCB/

OPERATION 2 PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-1)

Remove the 5 screws 1.

Remove the Top Cabinet in the direction of arrow (A).

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP651, CP653).

Unlock the 8 supports 2.

Remove the Front Cabinet in the direction of arrow (B).

Remove the 6 screws 3.

Remove the Operation PCB and Operation 2 PCB in the

direction of arrow (C).

Top Cabinet

(A)

(B)

(C)

Operation 2 PCB

3333

Front Cabinet

Operation PCB

1-3:

(C)

CP651

CP653

Fig. 1-1

DVD DECK/DVD MT PCB/USB BLOCK

(Refer to Fig. 1-3)

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

Short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1-3 using a

soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no

soldering, the Laser may be damaged.

Unlock the support 1 and remove the Deck Top Holder

in the direction of arrow (A).

Remove the 2 screws 2.

Remove the 2 screws 3.

Remove the screw 4.

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP501, CP8001, CP6601).

Remove the DVD Deck in the direction of arrow (B).

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP2301, CP2302, CP2303).

Remove the 2 screws 5.

Remove the DVD MT PCB in the direction of arrow (C).

Remove the 3 screws 6.

Remove the Front Angle in the direction of arrow (D).

Remove the 2 screws 7.

Remove the USB Block in the direction of arrow (E).

Fig. 1-3

Deck Top Holder

(A)

CP501

CP8001

NOTE

Before your operation, please read “PREPARATION OF

SERVICING”.

Use the Lead Free solder.

Manual soldering conditions

• Soldering temperature: 350 ± 5˚C

• Soldering time: Within 2 seconds

• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu

When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the drawing

equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the Flux smoke

away from it.

When installing the DVD Deck, remove all the soldering on

the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up

PCB and DVD MT PCB connector.

DVD Deck

(E)

DVD MT PCB

CP2301

CP2302

CP2303

CP6601

(C)

Front Angle

Short circuit using a

soldering iron.

Pick Up PCB

(D)

(B)

USB Block

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

B1-2

FE Head

VCR Deck

1-4: VCR DECK (Refer to Fig. 1-4)

Do not remove the cable at the FE Head section. The FE

Head may be damaged if you remove the cable by force.

NOTE

Remove the screw 1.

Remove the FE Head.

Move the Cassette Holder Ass’y to the back side.

Remove the 2 screws 2.

Remove the 2 screws 3.

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP101, CP102, CP3001).

Remove the VCR Deck in the direction of arrow.

Fig. 1-4

1-5: VCR MT PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-5)

Remove the screw 1.

Remove the 6 screws 2.

Remove the 2 screws 3.

Remove the Shiel Jack.

Remove the VCR MT PCB in the direction of arrow.

VCR MT PCB

Fig. 1-5

Shield Jack

CP101

CP102

CP3001

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

B2-1

2. REMOVAL OF VCR DECK PARTS

2-1: TOP BRACKET (Refer to Fig. 2-1)

Extend the 2 supports 1.

Slide the 2 supports 2 and remove the Top Bracket.

2-2: CASSETTE HOLDER ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 2-2)

Move the Cassette Holder Ass'y to the front side.

Push the Locker R to remove the Cassette Side R.

Remove the Cassette Side L.

Fig. 2-1

Main Chassis

Top Bracket

Main Chassis

Cassette Side L

Cassette Side R

Locker R

Fig. 2-2

Link Unit

2-3: LINK UNIT (Refer to Fig. 2-3)

Set the Link Unit to the Eject position.

Unlock the support 1.

Remove the (A) side of the Link Unit first, then remove

the (B) side.

Fig. 2-3

(A)

Link Unit

Main Chassis

Link Unit

(B)

Main Chassis

NOTE

1. After installation of the Top Bracket, bend the support 1

so that the Top Bracket is fixed.

2-4: LINK LEVER/FLAP LEVER (Refer to Fig. 2-4)

Extend the support 1.

Remove the Link Lever.

Remove the Flap Lever.

Fig. 2-4

Link Lever

Flap Lever

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

B2-2

2-5: LOADING MOTOR/WORM (Refer to Fig. 2-5-A)

Remove the screw 1.

Remove the Loading Motor.

Remove the Worm.

Fig. 2-5-A

Loading Motor

Worm

• Screw Torque: 3 ± 0.5kgf•cm

Main Chassis

NOTE

In case of the Worm installation, check if the value of the

Fig. 2-5-B is correct.

In case of the Loading Motor installation, hook the wire on

the Cassette Opener as shown Fig. 2-5-C.

When installing the wires between Capstan DD Unit and

Loading Motor, connect them correctly as shown Fig. 2-5-D.

Fig. 2-5-B

19.2 ± 0.1mm

Safety surface for pressing

of the insert.

2-6: TENSION ASS’Y (Refer to Fig. 2-6-B)

Turn the Pinch Roller Cam clockwise so that the Tension

Holder hook is set to the position of Fig. 2-6-A to move

the Tension Arm Ass’y.

Remove the Tension Spring.

Unlock the 2 supports 1 and remove the Tension Band.

Unlock the support 2 and remove the Tension Arm Ass’y.

Unlock the support 3 and remove the Tension Connect.

Float the hook 4 and turn it clockwise then remove the

Tension Holder.

Fig. 2-5-C

Loading Motor

Cassette Opener

Fig. 2-6-B

Tension Band

Tension Connect

Tension Spring Tension Arm Ass’y

Tension Holder

NOTE

In case of the Tension Band installation, note the direc-

tion of the installation. (Refer to Fig. 2-6-C)

In case of the Tension Band installation, install correctly

as Fig. 2-6-D.

In case of the Tension Connect installation, install as the

circled section of Fig. 2-6-E.

Fig. 2-6-C

Tension Band

Tension Connect

Tension Arm Ass’y

Fig. 2-6-A

Fig. 2-5-D

Pink

Loading Motor

White

Capstan DD Unit

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

B2-3

Fig. 2-6-D

[OK]

[NG]

Tension Connect

Tension Band

Tension Connect Tension Band

Fig. 2-6-E

Tension Connect

Main Chassis

2-7: T BRAKE ARM/T BRAKE BAND (Refer to Fig. 2-7-A)

Remove the T Brake Spring.

Turn the T Brake Arm clockwise and bend the hook

section to remove it.

Unlock the 2 supports 1 and remove the T Brake Band.

Fig. 2-7-A

T Brake Band

Hook section

T Brake Arm

T Brake Spring

NOTE

1. In case of the T Brake Band installation, install correctly

as Fig. 2-7-B.

Fig. 2-7-B

[OK]

[NG]

T Brake Arm

T Brake Band

T Brake Arm

T Brake Band

2-8: S REEL/T REEL/IDLER ARM ASS’Y/IDLER GEAR

(Refer to Fig. 2-8-A)

Remove the S Reel and T Reel.

Remove the 2 Polyslider Washers 1.

Remove the Idler Arm Ass’y and Idler Gear.

NOTE

Take care not to damage the gears of the S Reel and T

Reel.

The Polyslider Washer may on the back of the reel.

Take care not to damage the shaft.

Do not touch section “A” of S Reel and T Reel. (Use

gloves.) (Refer to Fig. 2-8-A) Touching may leave stains

on section "A".

When you install the reel, clean the shaft and grease it. (If

you do not grease, noise may be heard in FF/REW

mode.)

After installing the reel, adjust the height of the reel.

(Refer to MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT)

Fig. 2-8-A

Idler Gear

Idler Arm Ass’y

S Reel

T Reel

(A)

NOTE

In case of the S Reel and T Reel installation, check if the

correct parts are installed. (Refer to Fig. 2-8-B)

In case of the Idler Arm Ass’y installation, install correctly

as Fig. 2-8-C. And also set it so that the section “B” of

Fig. 2-8-A is placed under the Main Chassis tab.

Fig. 2-8-B

Big Hole

(S Reel) Small Hole

(T Reel)

Fig. 2-8-C

[OK]

[NG]

Clutch Gear Idler Arm Ass’y

Idler Arm Ass’y

Clutch Gear

(B)

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

B2-4

2-9: CASSETTE OPENER/PINCH ROLLER BLOCK/P5

ARM ASS’Y (Refer to Fig. 2-9-A)

2. Unlock the support 1 and remove the Cassette Opener.

Remove the Pinch Roller Block and P5 Arm Ass’y.

Fig. 2-9-A

Cassette Opener

Pinch Roller Block

P5 Arm Ass’y

Main Chassis

NOTE

2. Do not touch the Pinch Roller. (Use gloves.)

In case of the Pinch Roller Block and the Pinch Roller

Cam installation, install correctly as Fig. 2-9-B.

Fig. 2-9-B

Pinch Roller Block Can be seen the hole of

the Pinch Roller Cam.

P5 Arm Ass’y

Can be seen the hole of the

Main Cam.

2-10: A/C HEAD (Refer to Fig. 2-10-A)

Remove the screw 1.

Remove the A/C Head Base.

Remove the 3 screws 2.

Remove the A/C Head and A/C Head Spring.

NOTE

Do not touch the A/C Head. (Use gloves.)

When you install the A/C Head Spring, install as shown in

Fig. 2-10-B.

When you install the A/C Head, tighten the screw (1) first,

then tighten the screw (2), finally tighten the screw (3).

Fig. 2-10-A

(1)

A/C Head

A/C Head Spring

A/C Head Base

• Screw Torque: 5 ± 0.5kgf•cm (Screw 1)

(3)

(2)

Fig. 2-10-B

Spring Position

2-11: FE HEAD (RECORDER ONLY) (Refer to Fig. 2-11)

Remove the screw 1.

Remove the FE Head.

FE Head

• Screw Torque: 5 ± 0.5kgf•cm

• The FE Head is not installed on the Video Cassette Player. Fig. 2-11

2-12: CYLINDER UNIT ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 2-12)

Disconnect the following connector:

(CD2001).

Remove the 3 screws 1.

Remove the Cylinder Unit Ass'y.

When you install the Cylinder Unit Ass'y, tighten the

screws from (1) to (3) in order while pulling the Ass'y

toward the left front direction.

NOTE

Fig. 2-12

• Screw Torque: 3 ± 0.5kgf•cm

Cylinder Unit Ass'y

(1)

(3)

(2)

CD2001

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

B2-5

2-14: MAIN CAM/PINCH ROLLER CAM/JOINT GEAR

(Refer to Fig. 2-14-A)

2. Remove the E-Ring 1, then remove the Main Cam.

Remove the E-Ring 2, then remove the Pinch Roller

Cam and Joint Gear.

Fig. 2-14-A

Main Cam

Pinch Roller Cam

Joint Gear

NOTE

1. In case of the Pinch Roller Cam and Main Cam installa-

tion, install them as shown in the circled section of Fig. 2-

14-B so that the markers meet. (Refer to Fig. 2-14-B)

And also can be seen the Main Chassis hole through the

Main Cam maker hole.

Fig. 2-14-B

Pinch Roller Cam

Marker

Main Cam

2-15: LOADING GEAR S/T UNIT (Refer to Fig. 2-15-A)

Remove the E-Ring 1 and remove the Main Loading

Gear.

Remove the Main Rod, Tension Lever, Loading Arm S

Unit and Loading Arm T Unit.

Main Loading Gear

Main Rod

Tension Lever

Loading Arm T Unit

Loading Arm S Unit

Fig. 2-15-A

2-13: CAPSTAN DD UNIT (Refer to Fig. 2-13)

Remove the Capstan Belt.

Remove the screw 1.

Remove the Capstan Holder.

Remove the 3 screws 2.

Remove the Capstan DD Unit.

• Screw Torque: 4 ± 0.5kgf•cm

Capstan DD Unit

Capstan Belt

Fig. 2-13

Capstan Holder

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

B2-6

Clutch Ass’y

Ring Spring

Clutch Lever

Coupling Gear

Coupling Spring

Clutch Gear

NOTE

1. When you install the Loading Arm S Unit, Loading Arm T

Unit and Main Loading Gear, align each marker. (Refer

to Fig. 2-15-B)

Fig. 2-15-B

Marker

Main Loading Gear

Loading Arm T Unit Loading Arm S Unit

Marker

2-16: CLUTCH ASS’Y/RING SPRING/CLUTCH LEVER/

CLUTCH GEAR (Refer to Fig. 2-16-A)

Remove the Polyslider Washer 1.

Remove the Clutch Ass’y and Ring Spring.

Remove the Clutch Lever.

Remove the Coupling Gear, Coupling Spring and Clutch

Gear.

Fig. 2-16-A

NOTE

1. In case of the Clutch Ass’y installation, install it with

inserting the spring of the Clutch Ass’y into the dent of the

Coupling Gear. (Refer to Fig. 2-16-B)

Fig. 2-16-B

Clutch Ass’y

Coupling Gear

2-17:

Remove the P4 Cap.

Unlock the support 1 and remove the Cassette Guide

Post.

Remove the Inclined Base S/T Unit.

Remove the screw 2.

Remove the LED Reflector.

Fig. 2-17-A

CASSETTE GUIDE POST/INCLINED BASE S/T

UNIT/P4 CAP/LED REFLECTOR

(Refer to Fig. 2-17-A)

P4 Cap

Cassette Guide Post

Inclined Base T Unit

Inclined Base S Unit

LED Reflector

NOTE

Do not touch the roller of Guide Roller.

In case of the P4 Cap installation, install it with parallel

for “A” and “B” of Fig. 2-17-B.

In case of the Cassette Guide Post installation, install

correctly as the circled section of Fig. 2-17-C.

Fig. 2-17-B

“A” “B”

P4 Cap Cassette Opener

[OK]

Cassette Guide Post

[NG]

Cassette Guide Post

Fig. 2-17-C

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

B3-1

Main Frame Ass'y

Check Hook

3. REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS

3-1: TRAY (Refer to Fig. 3-1-A)

Set the Tray opened. (Refer to the DISC REMOVAL

METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY)

Unlock the 2 supports 1 and remove the Tray.

Fig. 3-1-A

Tray

Main Frame Ass'y

NOTE

1. In case of the Tray installation, install them as the circled

section of Fig. 3-1-B so that the each markers are met.

3-2: MAIN CHASSIS ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 3-2-A)

Remove the screw 1.

Unlock the 2 supports 2.

Remove the Insulator (R) from the Main Frame Ass'y.

Remove the Main Chassis Ass'y.

Fig. 3-2-A

Tray

Main Frame Ass'y

Fig. 3-1-B

Insulator (R)

NOTE

1. Do not disassemble the DVD DECK PARTS except listed

parts here. Minute adjustments are needed if the

disassemble is done. If the repair is needed except listed

parts, replace the DVD MECHA ASS'Y.

Main Frame Ass'y

Main Chassis Ass'y

• Screw Torque: 2.0 ± 0.5kgf•cm

NOTE

In case of the Main Chassis Ass'y, install it from (1) to (4)

in order. (Refer to Fig. 3-2-B)

In case of the Main Chassis Ass'y installation, hook the

wire on the Main Frame Ass'y as shown Fig. 3-2-C.

Fig. 3-2-B

Fig. 3-2-C

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(3)

Check Lock

(4)

Main Chassis Ass'y

Rack Loading

Main Frame Ass'y (Bottom Side)

Traverse Holder

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

B3-2

NOTE

In case of the Pulley Motor installation, check if the value

of the Fig. 3-3-B is correct.

When installing the Loading Motor PCB Ass'y, install it

correctly as Fig. 3-3-C.

In case of the Loading Motor PCB Ass'y installation, hook

the wire on the Main Frame Ass'y as shown Fig. 3-3-C.

Fig. 3-3-B

7.0 ± 0.1mm

Safety surface for pressing

of the insert.

Loading Motor

Pulley Motor

Fig. 3-3-C

Rack Loading AB

The Lever should be position

between A and B.

Check Hook

3-4: RACK LOADING/MAIN GEAR/PULLEY GEAR

(Refer to Fig. 3-4-A)

Press down the catcher 1 and slide the Rack Loading.

Unlock the support 2 and remove the Pulley Gear.

Remove the Main Gear.

Loading Motor PCB Ass’y

Loading Belt

Pulley Gear

Main Frame Ass’y

3-3: LOADING MOTOR PCB ASS'Y/ LOADING BELT

(Refer to Fig. 3-3-A)

Remove the Loading Belt.

Remove the screw 1.

Remove the 2 screws 2.

Remove the Loading Motor PCB Ass'y.

Remove the Pulley Gear.

Fig. 3-3-A

Loading Motor PCB Ass’y

• Screw Torque: 2.5 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 1)

• Screw Torque: 1.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 2)

Rack Loading

Main Frame Ass’y

Main Gear

Pulley Gear

Fig. 3-4-A

Fig. 3-4-B

NOTE

1. In case of the Rack Loading installation, do not mesh it

to the Main Gear as shown the Fig. 3-4-B.

Check Hook

Main Gear

Rack Loading

3-5: CLAMPER ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 3-5-A)

Press the Clamper and rotate the Clamper Plate

clockwise, then unlock the 3 supports 1.

Remove the Clamper Plate, Clamper Magnet and

Clamper.

Clamper Plate

Clamper Magnet

Fig. 3-5-A

Main Frame

Clamper

NOTE

1. In case of the Clamper Ass'y installation, install correctly

as Fig. 3-5-B.

Fig. 3-5-B

No gap

Clamper Plate

Clamper

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

B3-3

Fig. 3-6-C

Insulator (R) Main Chassis Ass'y (Top Side)

3-7:

Remove the screw 1.

Remove the Rack Feed Ass'y.

Remove the screw 2.

Remove the Switch PCB Ass'y.

Remove the 2 screw 3.

Remove the Feed Motor.

Remove the Motor Gear.

RACK FEED ASS'Y/SWITCH PCB ASS'Y/FEED

MOTOR (Refer to Fig. 3-7-A)

Traverse Holder

Insulator (F)

Main Chassis Ass'y

Insulator (F)

Insulator (R)

3-6:

Remove the Traverse Holder.

Remove the 2 Insulator (F).

Remove the Insulator (R).

Fig. 3-6-A

TRAVERSE HOLDER/INSULATOR (F)/INSULATOR

(R) (Refer to Fig. 3-6-A)

NOTE

In case of the Insulator (F) installation, install correctly as

Fig. 3-6-B.

In case of the Insulator (R) installation, install correctly as

Fig. 3-6-C.

Fig. 3-6-B

Traverse Holder

Insulator (F)

Fig. 3-7-C

6.0 ± 0.2mm

Safety surface for pressing

of the insert.

Feed Motor

Motor Gear

NOTE

When pushing the Rack Feed in the direction of the

arrow, it should be restored to the original position by the

spring force. (Refer to Fig. 3-7-B)

In case of the Motor Gear installation, check if the value

of the Fig. 3-7-C is correct.

When installing the wire of the Switch PCB Ass'y, install it

correctly as Fig. 3-7-D.

After the assembly of the Main Chassis Ass'y, hook the

wire on the Main Chassis Ass'y as shown Fig. 3-7-E.

Fig. 3-7-B

Push

Rack Feed Ass'y

~ FEED MOTOR ~

BLUE (4)

ORANGE (3)

~ SPINDLE MOTOR ~

BLACK (2)

RED (1)

Fig. 3-7-D

Switch PCB Ass'y

• Install wire from (1) to (4) in order.

Main Chassis Ass'y (Bottom Side)

Check Hook

Fig. 3-7-E

Check Hook

• Loosen the wire in the direction of the arrow.

Fig. 3-7-A

• Screw Torque: 5.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 1)

• Screw Torque: 3.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 2)

• Screw Torque: 1.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 3)

Main Chassis Ass'y

Rack Feed Ass'y

Switch PCB Ass'y

Motor Gear

Feed Motor

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

B3-4

Printing Surface

Reinforcement Plate

59 ± 1mm

Fold

(1)

Printing Surface

10 ± 1mm

Fold

(3)

Printing Surface

44 ± 1mm

Fold

(4)

Printing Surface

10 ± 1mm

Fold

(2)

Reinforcement Plate

Printing Surface

Fold

43 ± 1mm

54 ± 1mm

Printing Surface

Pick Up Side

Fold it by 90˚

[ 24 pin FFC ]

When installing the FFC, fold it correctly and install it as

shown from Fig. 3-8-A to Fig. 3-8-C.

3-8: FFC WIRE HANDLING

Do not make the folding lines except the specified

positions for the FFC.

NOTE

Fig. 3-8-A

• Proceed the steps (1) through (4).

[ 6 pin FFC ]

Fig. 3-8-B

Printing Surface

Reinforcement Plate

55 ± 1mm

Fold

(1)

Printing Surface

10 ± 1mm

Fold

(3)

Printing Surface

60 ± 1mm

Fold

(4)

Printing Surface

10 ± 1mm

Fold

(2)

Reinforcement Plate

• Proceed the steps (1) through (4).

[ 5 pin FFC ]

Fig. 3-8-C

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

B4-1

4. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT

PACKAGE IC

REMOVAL

1. Put Masking Tape (cotton tape) around the Flat Package

IC to protect other parts from any damage.

(Refer to Fig. 4-1.)

NOTE

Masking is carried out on all the parts located within

10 mm distance from IC leads.

Fig. 4-1

Masking Tape

(Cotton Tape)

2. Heat the IC leads using a blower type IC desoldering

machine. (Refer to Fig. 4-2.)

NOTE

Do not rotate or move the IC back and forth , until IC

can move back and forth easily after desoldering the

leads completely.

Fig. 4-2

Blower type IC

desoldering machine

3. When IC starts moving back and forth easily after

desoldering completely, pickup the corner of the IC using

a tweezers and remove the IC by moving with the IC

desoldering machine. (Refer to Fig. 4-3.)

NOTE

Some ICs on the PCB are affixed with glue, so be

careful not to break or damage the foil of each IC

leads or solder lands under the IC when removing it.

Fig. 4-3

Blower type IC

desoldering machine

Tweezers

5. Peel off the Masking Tape.

Absorb the solder left on the pattern using the Braided

Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 4-4.)

NOTE

Do not move the Braided Shield Wire in the vertical

direction towards the IC pattern.

Fig. 4-4

Braided Shield Wire

Soldering Iron

IC pattern

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

B4-2

Fig. 4-5

INSTALLATION

1. Take care of the polarity of new IC and then install the

new IC fitting on the printed circuit pattern. Then solder

each lead on the diagonal positions of IC temporarily.

(Refer to Fig. 4-5.)

Soldering Iron

Solder temporarily Solder temporarily

2. Supply the solder from the upper position of IC leads

sliding to the lower position of the IC leads.

(Refer to Fig. 4-6.)

Fig. 4-6

Solder

Soldering Iron

Supply soldering

from upper position

to lower position

3. Absorb the solder left on the lead using the Braided

Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 4-7.)

NOTE

Do not absorb the solder to excess.

Fig. 4-7

Soldering Iron

Braided Shield Wire

4. When bridge-soldering between terminals and/or the

soldering amount are not enough, resolder using a Thin-

tip Soldering Iron. (Refer to Fig. 4-8.)

Fig. 4-8

Thin-tip Soldering Iron

5. Finally, confirm the soldering status on four sides of the

IC using a magnifying glass.

Confirm that no abnormality is found on the soldering

position and installation position of the parts around the

IC. If some abnormality is found, correct by resoldering.

NOTE

When the IC leads are bent during soldering and/or

repairing, do not repair the bending of leads. If the

bending of leads are repaired, the pattern may be

damaged. So, always be sure to replace the IC in this

case.

KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS

A/C

ACC

AFC

AFT

AFT DET

AGC

AMP

ANT

A.PB

APC

ASS'Y

AUTO

A/V

BGP

BOT

BPF

BRAKE SOL

BUFF

B/W

CASE

CAP

CARR

CLK

CLOCK (SY-SE)

COMB

CONV

CPM

CTL

CYL

CYL-M

CYL SENS

DATA (SY-CE)

DD Unit

DEMOD

DET

DEV

EMPH

ENC

ENV

EOT

EXT

FBC

FL SW

FSC

FWD

GEN

GND

Audio/Control

Automatic Color Control

Audio Erase

Automatic Frequency Control

Automatic Fine Tuning

Automatic Fine Tuning Detect

Automatic Gain Control

Amplifier

Antenna

Audio Playback

Automatic Phase Control

Assembly

All Time

Automatic

Audio/Video

Burst Gate Pulse

Beginning of Tape

Bandpass Filter

Brake Solenoid

Buffer

Black and White

Capacitance, Collector

Cassette

Capstan

Carrier

Channel

Clock

Clock (Syscon to Servo)

Combination, Comb Filter

Converter

Capstan Motor

Control

Cylinder

Cylinder-Motor

Cylinder-Sensor

Data (Syscon to Servo)

Decibel

Direct Current

Direct Drive Motor Unit

Demodulator

Detector

Deviation

Emitter

Emitter Follower

Emphasis

Encoder

Envelope

End of Tape

Equalizer

External

Fuse

Feed Back Clamp

Full Erase

Fast Forward, Flip-flop

Frequency Generator

Front Loading Switch

Frequency Modulation

Frequency Sub Carrier

Forward

Generator

Ground

H.P.F

H.SW

IND

INV

KIL

LED

LIMIT AMP

LM, LDM

L.P.F

LUMI.

MAX

MINI

MIX

MOD

MPX

MS SW

OSC

OPE

PB CTL

PB-C

PB-Y

PCB

P. CON

P-P

REC

REC-C

REC-Y

REEL BRK

REEL S

REF

REG

REW

REV, RVS

RMC

S. CLK

S. COM

S. DATA

SEG

SEL

SENS

SER

SIF

SOL

High Pass Filter

Head Switch

Hertz

Integrated Circuit

Intermediate Frequency

Indicator

Inverter

Killer

Left

Light Emitting Diode

Limiter Amplifier

Loading Motor

Long Play

Low Pass Filter

Luminance

Motor

Maximum

Minimum

Mixer, mixing

Monostable Multivibrator

Modulator, Modulation

Multiplexer, Multiplex

Mecha State Switch

Non Connection

Noise Reduction

Oscillator

Operation

Playback

Playback Control

Playback-Chrominance

Playback-Luminance

Printed Circuit Board

Power Control

Phase Detector

Pulse Generator

Peak-to Peak

Right

Recording

Recording-Chrominance

Recording-Luminance

Reel Brake

Reel Sensor

Reference

Regulated, Regulator

Rewind

Reverse

Radio Frequency

Remote Control

Relay

Serial Clock

Sensor Common

Serial Data

Segment

Select, Selector

Sensor

Search Mode

Serial Input

Sound Intermediate Frequency

Serial Output

Solenoid

Standard Play

C1-1

KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS

STB

SYNC

SYNC SEP

TRAC

TRICK PB

UNREG

VCO

VIF

V.PB

V.REC

VSF

VSR

VSS

V-SYNC

X'TAL

Y/C

Serial Strobe

Switch

Synchronization

Sync Separator, Separation

Transistor

Tracking

Trick Playback

Test Point

Unregulated

Volt

Voltage Controlled Oscillator

Video Intermediate Frequency

Vertical Pulse, Voltage Display

Video Playback

Variable Resistor

Video Recording

Visual Search Fast Forward

Visual Search Rewind

Voltage Super Source

Vertical-Synchronization

Voltage Tuning

Crystal

Luminance/Chrominance

C1-2

C2-1

SERVICE MODE LIST

This unit is provided with the following SERVICE MODES so you can repair, examine and adjust easily.

To enter to the SERVICE MODE function, press and hold both buttons simultaneously on the main unit or on the main unit and on

the remote control for more than a standard time in the appropriate condition. (See below chart.)

In case of the main unit and remote control, press the remote control buttons first, then press the main unit buttons.

Set Key Operations

Remocon

Key Standard

Time

Initialization of factory DVD data.

NOTE: Do not use this for normal servicing.

REC 4 2 sec.

Set

Condition

DVD mode

(No disc)

DVD Write mode.

Refer to the “RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE”.

NOTE: Do not use this for the normal servicing.

REC 6 2 sec.

DVD mode

(Stop)

Method Operations

Set Key Operations

CH UP

PLAY/REC total hours are displayed on the TV Monitor.

Refer to the “PREVENTIVE CHECKS AND SERVICE INTERVALS”

(CONFIRMATION OF HOURS USED).

Can be checked of the INITIAL DATA of MEMORY IC.

Refer to the “WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC”.

Set Key

FWD 2 sec.

CH UP PLAY 2 sec.

Initialization of factory VCR data.

NOTE: Do not use this for normal servicing.

If you set factory initialization, the memories are reset such as

the clock setting, the channel setting, and PLAY/REC total

hours.

Standard

Time

CH DOWN ON/

STANDBY 2 sec.

VCR operation mode at no connection of DVD.

Refer to the “PREPARATION FOR SERVICING”

NOTE: Although the DVD is connected, the DVD mode cannot be

selected.

Adjust the PG SHIFTER automatically.

Refer to the “ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT”.

CH UP STOP 2 sec.

Set

Condition

VCR mode

Power Off

VCR mode

(Playback)

VCR mode

Releasing of PARENTAL LOCK.

Refer to the “PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL”.

STOP 7 3 sec.

DVD mode

(No disc)

Check for the firmware version.

Refer to the “RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE”.

NOTE: Do not use this for the normal servicing.

STOP 1 3 sec.

DVD mode

(Stop)

Press the following remocon

keys continuously.

SETUP SUBTITLE 3

AUDIO 0

Press the ATR button on the

remote control for more than

2 seconds during PLAY.

Adjusting of the Tracking to the center position.

Refer to the “MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT” (GUIDE ROLLER) and “ELECTRICAL

ADJUSTMENT” (PG SHIFTER).

Make the short circuit

between the test point of

SERVICE and the GND.

The BOT, EOT, and the Reel Sensor do not work and the VCR deck can be operated

without a cassette tape.

Refer to the “PREPARATION FOR SERVICING”

Tray cannot be opened.

Refer to the “TRAY LOCK”.

C3-1

PREVENTIVE CHECKS AND SERVICE INTERVALS

The following standard table depends on environmental conditions and usage.

Parts replacing time does not mean the life span for individual parts.

Also, long term storage or misuse may cause transformation and aging of rubber parts.

The following list means standard hours, so the checking hours depends on the conditions.

: Clean

: Check it and if necessary, replace it.

Time

Parts Name

500

hours 1,000

hours Notes

1,500

hours 2,000

hours 2,500

hours

Audio Control Head

Full Erase Head

(Recorder only)

Capstan Belt

Pinch Roller

Capstan DD Unit

Loading Motor

Tension Band

Capstan Shaft

Tape Running

Guide Post

Cylinder Unit

Clean those parts in

contact with the tape.

Clean the rubber, and parts

which the rubber touches.

Replace when rolling

becomes abnormal.

Clean the Head

T Brake Band

Clutch Ass’y

Idler Arm Ass’y

CONFIRMATION OF HOURS USED

PLAY/REC total hours can be checked on the screen.

Total hours are displayed in 16 system of notation.

NOTE: If you set factory initialization, the total hours is reset to “0”.

Connect the set to TV Monitor.

Turn on the POWER, and set to the VCR mode.

Press both CH UP button on the set and the FF button on the set for more than 2 seconds.

The Fig. 1 screen will appear on TV Monitor.

After the confirmation of using hours, turn off the power.

Initial setting content of MEMORY IC.

PLAY/REC total hours.

= (16 x 16 x 16 x thousands digit value)

+ (16 x 16 x hundreds digit value)

+ (16 x tens digit value)

+ (ones digit value)

INIT 00 0E

PLAY/REC 0010

Fig. 1

PREVENTIVE CHECKS AND SERVICE INTERVALS

CLEANING

NOTE

After cleaning the heads with isopropyl alcohol, do not

run a tape until the heads dry completely. If the heads

are not completely dry and alcohol gets on the tape,

damage may occur.

1. AUDIO CONTROL HEAD

Clean the Audio Control Head with a cotton stick

soaked by alcohol. Clean the full erase head in the

same manner. (Refer to the figure below.)

2. TAPE RUNNING SYSTEM

When cleaning the tape transport system, use

gauze moistened with isopropyl alcohol.

3. CYLINDER

Wrap a piece of chamois around your finger. Dip it in

isopropyl alcohol. Hold it to the cylinder head softly.

Turn the cylinder head counterclockwise to clean it (in

the direction of the arrow). (Refer to the figure below.)

NOTE

Do not exert force against the cylinder head. Do not move

the chamois upward or downward on the head.

Use the chamois one by one.

Cylinder Head

Audio Control Head

C3-2

C4-1

Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.

Confirm that the "No Disc" will be appeared on the screen.

Open the DVD tray.

Press both Channel button (6) on the remote control and the REC button on the set for more than 2 seconds.

Press OPEN/CLOSE button on the unit to check if all the keys on the unit do not function.

NOTE: To check if DVD Write mode is set.

When inserting Up-Date Disc at Non DVD Write mode, the read error will happen.

Place the Up-Date Disc and close the tray by hand. (Refer to SERVICING FIXTURE AND TOOLS)

Automatic read will start and "CD-R UPDATE PROCESS" will be displayed on the screen.

At this time, the horizontal noise lines may appear. But no problem.

Approxi. 20 seconds later, the tray will open automatically. Remove the Up-Date Disc.

Then, Approxi. 40 seconds later, the above indication will disappear and the tray will close automatically.

When the "No Disc" appears on the screen, the write will end.

NOTE: Do not turn off the unit or push the tray by hand to close it.

Up-Date error will happen and can not be done with the Up-Date of Up-Date Disc.

Unplug the AC cord, then plug it in.

After the write, set to the initializing of shipping.

Set to the DVD mode, press both Channel button (4) on the remote control and the REC button on the set for more than 2

seconds.

The "INITIALIZE 5 ---> COMPLETE" will appear on the screen.

Then unplug the AC cord, and plug it in.

CHECK FOR THE FIRMWARE VERSION

Set to the DVD mode, press both Channel button (1) on the remote control and the STOP button on the set for more than

3 seconds.

Firmware version will be displayed on the top left of the screen.

Turn off the power

RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

No Disc

ACALA6213C A C A L A 6 2 1 3 C

Fixed

Release date (Example: 2006.2.13)

Released times on the same date

A = October

B = November

C = December

When the changed version displays, the Re-write will be completed.

C4-2

WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC

If a service repair is undertaken where it has been required to change the MEMORY IC, the following steps should be taken to

ensure correct data settings while making reference to TABLE 1.

INIT +0 +1 +2 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +A +B +C +D +E +F

00 0E 32 BE FF 64 64 4A 86 0B 26 86 32 8A C8 0A 01

10 AF 97 95 8A B0 6A 31 04 88 A5 9F 3A 00 10 BF 00

20 2A 11 22 70 61 2A 3A 00 0B 00 60 E5 9A B0 00 37

30 03 17 00 84 00 00 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

10.

11.

12.

The unit will now have the correct DATA for the new MEMORY IC.

Table 1

ADDRESS is now selected and should "blink". Using the SET + or - button on the remote, step through the ADDRESS

until required ADDRESS to be changed is reached.

Press ENTER to select DATA. When DATA is selected, it will "blink".

Again, step through the DATA using SET + or - button until required DATA value has been selected.

Pressing ENTER will take you back to ADDRESS for further selection if necessary.

Repeat steps 4 to 7 until all data has been checked.

When satisfied correct DATA has been entered, turn POWER off (return to STANDBY MODE) to finish DATA input.

After the data input, set to the initializing of shipping.

Turn on the POWER, and set to the VCR mode.

Press both CH UP button on the set and the PLAY button on the set for more than 2 seconds.

After the finishing of the initializing of shipping, the unit will turn off automatically.

Fig. 1

Connect the set to TV Monitor.

Turn on the POWER, and set to the VCR mode.

Press both CH UP button on the set and the FF button on the set for more than 2 seconds.

ADDRESS and DATA will appear on TV Monitor as Fig 1.

INIT 00 0E

PLAY/REC 0010

ADDRESS DATA

RF SIGNAL CHECK OF DVD MT PCB

RF signal check can be done at the following A~F resistance points on the DVD MT PCB.

DVD MT PCB (BOTTOM SIDE)

DMF071A

C4-3

F E

SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS

Taper nut driver

70909228

Back tension cassette gauge

70909103

Torque cassette gauge

(KT-300NR)

70909199

Adapter

Dial Torque Gauge

(10~90gf•cm)

(60~600gf•cm)

JG154 Cable

VTR cleaning kit VTR lubrication kit Grease JG002B

JG002E

JG002F

JG153 X Value Adjustment

Screwdriver

JG022 Master Plane JG024A Reel Disk Height

Adjustment Jig

Alignment Tape

ST-N5

ST-NF

JG185 TentelometerJG176 Up-Date Disc

Remarks

Part No.Ref. No. Parts Name

JG002B

JG002E

JG002F

APJG002B00

APJG002E00

APJG002F00

Adapter

Dial Torque Gauge (10~90gf•cm)

Dial Torque Gauge (60~600gf•cm)

VSR Torque, Brake Torque (S Reel/T Reel Ass'y)

Brake Torque (T Reel Ass'y)

VSR Torque, Brake Torque (S Reel)

JG154 APJG154000 Cable Used to connect the test point of SERVICE and GROUND

APJG022000JG022 Master Plane Reel Disk Height Adjustment

JG024A APJG024A00 Reel Disk Height Adjustment Jig Reel Disk Height Adjustment

JG153 APJG153000 X Value Adjustment Screwdriver X Value Adjustment

JG176 APJG176092 Up-Date Disc Up-Date of the Firmware

D1-1

JG185 APJG185000 Tentelometer Confirmation of Tape Tension on Playback

PREPARATION FOR SERVICING

How to use the Servicing Fixture

While pressing the CH DOWN button on the set for more than 2 seconds, press the ON/STANDBY button on the set

simultaneously at the Power OFF. Although the DVD is connected, the DVD mode cannot be selected.

Short circuit between TP3001 and Ground with the cable JG154.

(The BOT, EOT, and the Reel Sensor do not work and the VCR deck can be operated without a cassette tape.)

In case of using a cassette tape, press the EJECT button to insert or eject a cassette tape.

Turn on the power and re-check the cable before checking the trouble points.

When you servicing with connection of DVD, perform the operations above step 2 to step 3.

D2-1

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS

1. CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT

Read the following NOTES before starting work.

• Place an object which weighs between 450g~500g on the

Cassette Tape to keep it steady when you want to make

the tape run without the Cassette Holder. (Do not place an

object which weighs over 500g.)

CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF REEL DISK

HEIGHT

1-1:

Turn on the power and set to the STOP mode.

Set the master plane (JG022) and reel disk height

adjustment jig (JG024A) on the mechanism framework,

taking care not to scratch the drum, as shown in Fig. 1-1-

While turning the reel and confirm the following points.

Check if the surface "A" of reel disk is lower than the

surface "B" of reel disk height adjustment jig (JG024A)

and is higher than the surface "C". If it is not passed,

place the height adjustment washers and adjust to 10(+2,

-0)mm.

Adjust the other reel in the same way.

Fig. 1-2-B

1-3: CONFIRMATION OF PLAYBACK TORQUE AND

BACK TENSION TORQUE DURING PLAYBACK

Load a video tape (T-120) recorded in standard speed mode.

Set the unit to the PLAY mode.

Install the tentelometer (JG185) as shown in Fig. 1-3. Confirm

that the meter indicates 20 ± 2gf in the beginning of playback.

• USING A CASSETTE TYPE TORQUE TAPE (KT-300NR)

After confirmation and adjustment of Tension Post

position (Refer to item 1-2), load the cassette type

torque tape (KT-300NR) and set to the PLAY mode.

Confirm that the right meter of the torque tape indicates

50~90gf•cm during playback in SP mode.

Confirm that the left meter of the torque tape indicates

25~40gf•cm during playback in SP mode.

Tentelometer

(JG185)

Video Tape

Guide Roller

P1 Post Fig. 1-3

1-2: CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF TENSION

POST POSITION

Set to the PLAY mode.

Adjust the adjusting section for the Tension Arm position

so that the Tension Arm top is within the standard line of

Main Chassis.

While turning the S Reel clockwise, confirm that the edge

of the Tension Arm is located in the position described

above.

Fig. 1-2-A

Standard line of Main Chassis

Tension Arm

0.5mm (Adjusting range)

Reel Disk Height Adjustment Jig

(JG024A)

Fig. 1-1-A

Reel Disk

Height Adjustment

Washer

2.6x4.7xT0.13

2.6X4.7xT0.25

(B)

(C)

Master Plane (JG022)

Fig. 1-1-B

(A)

10(+0.2, -0)mm

Master Plane (JG022)

Reel Disk Height

Adjustment Jig

(JG024A)

Adjusting section for the

Tension Arm position

Bend

Tension Band

The Tension Arm top will

move to the outside direction

of the Main Chassis.

The Tension Arm top will

move to the inside direction

of the Main Chassis.

D2-2

Entrance Exit

Max

A : B ≥ 3 : 2

AMax

S Reel/Tension Band/Tension

Connect/Tension Arm Ass'y

T Reel/T Brake Band//T Brake

Spring/T Brake Arm

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS

1-4: CONFIRMATION OF VSR TORQUE

Install the Torque Gauge (JG002F) and Adapter (JG002B)

on the S Reel. Set to the Picture Search (Rewind) mode.

(Refer to Fig.1-4-B)

Then, confirm that it indicates 120~180gf•cm.

NOTE

If the torque is out of the range, replace the following parts.

Check item

1-4

1-5

Replacement Part

Idler Ass'y/Clutch Ass'y

S Reel side:

T Reel side:

2. CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF

TAPE RUNNING MECHANISM

Tape Running Mechanism is adjusted precisely at the

factory. Adjustment is not necessary as usual. When you

replace the parts of the tape running mechanism because of

long term usage or failure, the confirmation and adjustment

are necessary.

2-1: GUIDE ROLLER

Playback the VHS Alignment Tape (Monoscope of ST-N5

MODE2).

Connect CH-1 of the oscilloscope to TP101 (Envelope)

and CH-2 to TP3002 (SW Pulse).

Trigger with SW Pulse and observe the envelope. (Refer

to Fig. 2-1-A)

When observing the envelope, adjust the Taper Nut Driver

slightly until the envelope will be flat.

Even if you press the Tracking Button, adjust so that

flatness is not moved so much.

Adjust so that the A : B ratio is better than 3 : 2 as shown

in Fig. 2-1-B, even if you press the Tracking Button to

move the envelope (The envelope waveform will begin to

decrease when you press the Tracking Button).

Adjust the PG shifter during playback.

(Refer to the ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS)

NOTE

After adjustment, confirm and adjust A/C head.

(Refer to item 2-2)

Fig. 2-1-A

Fig. 2-1-B

NOTE

Install the Torque Gauge on the reel disk firmly. Press the

REW button to turn the reel disk.

1-5: CONFIRMATION OF REEL BRAKE TORQUE

(S Reel Brake) (Refer to Fig. 1-4-B)

Once set to the Fast Forward mode then set to the Stop

mode. While, unplug the AC cord when the Pinch Roller

Block is on the position of Fig. 1-4-A.

Move the Idler Ass'y from the S Reel.

Install the Torque Gauge (JG002F) and Adapter

(JG002B) on the S Reel. Turn the Torque Gauge

(JG002F) clockwise.

Then, confirm that it indicates 60~100gf•cm.

(T Reel Brake) (Refer to Fig. 1-4-B)

Once set to the Fast Forward mode then set to the Stop

mode. While, unplug the AC cord when the Pinch Roller

Block is on the position of Fig. 1-4-A.

Move the Idler Ass'y from the T Reel.

Install the Torque Gauge (JG002E) and Adapter

(JG002B) on the T reel. Turn the Torque Gauge

(JG002E) counterclockwise.

Then, confirm that it indicates 30~50gf•cm.

Fig. 1-4-A

The position at FF mode.

The position at

STOP mode.

Cassette

Opener

Pinch Roller Block

Capstan DD Unit

Cassette Holder Ass'y

Stop at this position.

Fig. 1-4-B

Torque Gauge/Adapter

(JG002F/JG002B)

T Reel

S Reel

Torque Gauge/Adapter

(JG002E/JG002B)

CH-2

SW Pulse (TP3002)

CH-1

Track

CH-2

Track

CH-1

Envelope

(TP101)

D2-3

Audio/Control Head

5[NG][OK]

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS

2-3:2-2:

When the Tape Running Mechanism does not work well,

adjust the following items.

CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF AUDIO/

CONTROL HEAD

When the height is not correct, turn the screw 3 to

adjust the height. Then, adjust the 1~3 again.

Playback the VHS Alignment Tape (Monoscope of ST-N5

MODE2).

Confirm that the reflected picture of stamp mark is

appeared on the tape prior to P4 Cap as shown in Fig. 2-

2-A.

Turn the screw 2 to set the audio level to maximum.

Confirm that the bottom of the Audio/ Control Head and

the bottom of the tape is shown in Fig. 2-2-C.

When the reflected picture is distorted, turn the screw

1 clockwise until the distortion is disappeared.

When the reflected picture is not distorted, turn the

screw 1 counterclockwise until little distortion is

appeared, then adjust the a).

P4 Cap

Fig. 2-2-A

Fig. 2-2-B

Audio/Control Head

Fig. 2-2-C

TAPE RUNNING ADJUSTMENT

(X VALUE ADJUSTMENT)

Confirm and adjust the height of the Reel Disk.

(Refer to item 1-1)

Confirm and adjust the position of the Tension Post.

(Refer to item 1-2)

Adjust the Guide Roller. (Refer to item 2-1)

Confirm and adjust the Audio/Control Head.

(Refer to item 2-2)

Connect CH-1 of the oscilloscope to TP3002 and CH-2 to

TP101.

Playback the VHS Alignment Tape (Monoscope of ST-N5

MODE2).

Press and hold the ATR button on the remote control

more than 2 seconds to set tracking to center.

Set the X Value adjustment driver (JG153) to the 4 of

Fig. 2-2-B. Adjust X value so that the envelope waveform

output becomes maximum. Then, check if the 5 section

of Fig. 2-2-B is on the center position (or rather to the

cylinder side). In case of the envelope maximum at the

difference position from the center, adjust the matching of

picture and sound again.

Audio/Control Head

Reflected picture of

Stamp Mark

Tape

0.25±0.05mm

D2-4

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS

3. MECHANISM ADJUSTMENT PARTS LOCATION GUIDE

8910

1. Tension Connect

2. Tension Arm

3. Guide Roller

4. Audio/Control Head

5. X value adjustment driver hole

10.

P4 Post

T Brake Spring

T Reel

S Reel

Adjusting section for the Tension Arm position

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

D3-1

Read and perform this adjustment when repairing the

circuits or replacing electrical parts or PCB assemblies.

1. BASIC ADJUSTMENT

CAUTION

1-1: PG SHIFTER

CONDITIONS

MODE-PLAYBACK

Input Signal-Alignment Tape

INSTRUCTIONS

Connect CH-1 on the oscilloscope to TP3002 and CH-2

to Video Out Jack.

Playback the alignment tape.

Press and hold the ATR button on the remote control

more than 2 seconds to set tracking to center.

Press both CH UP button on the set and the STOP button

on the set for more than 2 seconds.

When you exchange IC and Transistor with a heat sink,

apply silicon grease on the contact section of the heat

sink. Before applying new silicon grease, remove all the

old silicon grease. (Old grease may cause damages to the

IC and Transistor.)

6.5H

CH-1

CH-2

Fig. 1-1-A

CH-1

CH-2

6.5H

Fig. 1-1-B

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

2. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT PARTS LOCATION GUIDE (WIRING CONNECTION)

DVD MT PCB

DVD DECK

CD2301

CD2001

CP8101

CD4002

CD2302

OPERATION 2PCB

VCR MT PCB

TU301

S501

S502

CP501

FE HEAD AC HEAD

CD102

AC IN

CD8001

D3-2

CP2301

CP2303

CP2302

V651

OS651

J8008

TP101

TP3001

TP3002

J653

J652

J651

J8007

J8006

J8001

J8002

CP102

CD501

CP653

CP103

CP3001

CP8001

TP701

CD683

OPERATION PCB

CP651

CP6601

CP6602

USB PCB

CP683 CP682

CD682

CD6601

CD103

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-1

POWER DOES NOT TURN ON

(VCR SECTION)

YES

Check of T501

and peripheral circuit.

Check of V651

and peripheral circuit.

Check IC3001.

Check of T501

and peripheral circuit.

Is the voltage at

pin 41 of IC3001

0V?

Does display light? Is the voltage

linked to L506?

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-2

THE POWER SUPPLY CUT

Inserting a cassette

and push play button.

YES

Does the power cut

after 3 seconds?

Check CAPSTAN DD UNIT

and CYLINDER UNIT.

Does the power cut

after about 6 seconds?

Check Q3006, Q3008

and CAPSTAN BELT.

Check the POWER BLOCK.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-3

Check IC3001.

Check the DECK BLOCK.

YES

AT PLAYBACK AND RECORDING,

CYLINDER MOTOR UNLOAD

Is the voltage at pin 8 of

CP3001 about DC12.6V? Check IC502.

In playback, is at pin 12 of

CP3001 about DC2.6V?

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-4

YES

AUDIO SHAKES

Is AUDIO HEAD

scratched? Change AUDIO HEAD.

At playback, is input about

4.5Vp-p of a rectangular

wave at pin 9 of IC3001?

Change CAPSTAN DD UNIT.

Check IC3001.

At playback, is pin 5 of

CP3001 3.5V?

Check AUDIO BLOCK.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-5

Check LED of DECK,

PHOTO SENSOR.

Change

LOADING MOTOR.

The CASSETTE TAPE

CAN NOT BE INSERTED

Check WORM GEAR

of cassette loading block.

YES

Does WORM GEAR of

cassette loading block

move?

When a CASSETTE can

not inserted, is pin 25 of

IC3001 5V ?

When a CASSETTE is

inserted, is pin 8 of

CP3001 12.6V ?

Check circuit of POWER BLOCK.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-6

Check IC3001.

Does another CASSETTE

insert?

Check SW3001.

Defective CASSETTE

or cassette loading block.

YES

Does SW3001 and

REC LEVER

correctly set ?

After inserting

CASSETTE, is pin 35

of IC3001 0V ?

Correctly SW3001

and REC LEVER set.

WHEN INSERTING A CASSETTE,

IT EJECTS IMMEDIATELY

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-7

Check DECK MECHANISM.

CAN NOT FF/REW

YES

At FF/REW, does voltage

at pin 98 of IC3001

change?

Check of IC3001.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-8

Change CYLINDER unit.

TAPE LOADING IS OK, BUT

UNLOADS IMMEDIATELY

Check POWER BLOCK.

Change IC3001.

Check Q3006 and Q3008.

YES YES

YES

Does CYLINDER

rotate?

Is there HEAD SW

PULSE at TP3002 ?

Is the voltage

at pin 2 of CP3001

12V ?

At play, is the voltage

at pin 12 of CP3001 2.6V ?

Is PG PULSE signal

inputted to pin 104

of IC3001 ?

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-9

Change

CYLINDER MOTOR.

Change IC3001.

Change CYLINDER MOTOR.

YES

AT PLAY, THE PICTURE

JITTERS VERTICAL MINUTELY

Is FG wave of CP3001

at pin 11 5V ?

Is pin 12 of CP3001 2.6V ?

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-10

AUTO TRACKING

DOES NOT OPERATE

YES

In auto tracking, is the

voltage at pin 24 of IC3001

more than DC 0.2V?

Check CONTROL HEAD.

Change IC3001.

more than 0.6Vp-p

YES

Does the CTL pulse

signal (more than 0.6Vp-p)

appear at pin 7 of IC3001?

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-11

YES

WHEN PLAYBACK, FF OR REW

MODE IS ACTIVE, UNIT STOPS

IMMEDIATELY

Does CAPSTAN DD

MOTOR rotate?

Refer to section "CAPSTAN

DD MOTOR NOT

ROTAING".

Is there REEL SENSOR

PULSE signal at pins 38 and

39 of IC3001?

Check Q3001 and Q3002.

Change IC3001.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-12

YES

AT PLAY, PICTURE JITTERS

HORIZONTALLY

Does a noise on the picture

appear?

By adjusting the MANUAL

TRACKING UP/DOWN

BUTTONS, will the line

disappear?

Check P/B ENVELOPE.

Is a height of GUIDE POST

maximum?

The height of GUIDE POST

readjust.

Is PG SHIFTER

adjustment 6.5H? Adjust PG SHIFTER.

Is a wave of PB-Y unusual? Change IC101

and peripheral circuit.

Change IC101.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-13

YES

YES YES

NO NO

AT PLAYBACK, THE PICTUER

DOES NOT APPEAR

Does E-E picture

appear?

Is the voltage at pins 23,

44, 45, 68, 52 and 77 of

IC101 5V?

Check POWER BLOCK.

Is there video signal

at pin 26 of IC101? Change IC101.

Change IC8005.

Is there video signal

at pin 2 of IC8005?

Is there video signal

at pin 19 of IC3001?

Check J8001.

Change IC3001.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-14

YES

AT PLAYBACK, THE COLER DOES

NOT APPEAR

Is there color signal in

video signal at pin 26 of

IC101?

Is there video signal at pin

26 of IC101? Change X'tal.

Change IC101.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-15

YES

PLAYBACK PICTURE IS NOISY

(EVEN AFTER CLEANING HEADS)

Is noisy a wave of video

signal at pin 26 of IC101?

Is noisy a wave of video signal

of EMITTER of Q8004?

Check J8001.

Check Q8004.

Check CYLINDER.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-16

YES

NO COLOR DURING SELF

RECORDING AND PLAYBACK

Is there CHROMA signal

at pins 30 and 32 of

IC101?

Check TU301, IC8002, J653

and circuit around it.

Is there CHROMA signal at

pin 26 of IC101?

Check IC8005 and circuit around of

J8001.

Change IC101.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-17

YES

AT PLAY, AUDIO DOES NOT

APPEAR

At E-E, does audio appear? Refer to section "E-E DOES

NOT APPEAR".

Is the voltage at pins 6, 8

and 9 of IC101 about

2.5V?

Check A/C HEAD.

Check circuit around at pin

10 of IC101.

Check circuit around at pins

78 and 80 of IC101.

Is there audio signal at pin

10 of IC101?

Is there audio signal at

pins 78 and 80 of IC101?

Check whether there are not a

damage, dirt in AUDIO HEAD.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-18

YES

CAPSTAN DD MOTOR NOT

ROTATING

Check POWER BLOCK.

Change IC3001.

In playback, is there voltage

at pin 102 of IC3001 2.5V?

DD MOTOR rotate now?

If not, replace it.

In playback, is there voltage

at pin 2 of CP3001 12V?

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-19

YES

NO NO

THE AUDIO CAN NOT

RECORD

Is bias level at L102 OK?

In starting recording,

is there sine wave at

pin 96 of IC3001?

Check IC3001.

Check disconnection

and short of L102.

Is there audio signal at

pin 80 of IC101?

Is there voltage

of base of Q103

about 5V?

Check IC701 and

the circuit from TUNER

or audio input jack to IC701 .

Change Q103.

Change L101.

Is there a sine wave

at pin 5 of L101?

Check lead wire of A/C HEAD

and CONNECTOR.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-20

YES

THE CASSETTE INSERT, BUT

THE TAPE DOES NOT MOVE

Does the mode

appear at display?

Does operate with

remote control?

Check operation PCB.

Check LOADING MOTOR and

MODE SENSOR

RELATION DEPARTMENT.

Check IC3001.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-21

YES

NO NO

RECORDING MECHANISM WORKS,

BUT NO VIDEO RECORD FROM

INPUT JACK OR TUNER

Is there video signal at

pins 30 and 32 of IC

101?

Is the BASE of

Q103 5V?

Is the voltage at pin 96

of IC3001 5V?

Check circuit of video signal

from VIDEO IN or

TUNER to IC101.

Change IC3001.

Change IC101.

Is there video signal

at pin 26 of IC101?

Check CYLINDER UNIT and

circuit around of CP101.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-22

YES

E-E DOES NOT APPEAR

(THE PICTURE DOES NOT

APPEAR FROM TUNER)

Does normality AUDIO JACK

CONNECT? Connection is done over again.

Check POWER BLOCK.

Are there the voltage

of +B(5V) and TU(32V)

of TU301?

Check the picture.

Is there video signal at

pin 17 of TU301? Change TU301.

Change IC101.

Change IC3001.

Is there video signal

at pin 26 of IC101?

Is there video signal at

pin 19 of IC3001?

Check J8001.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-23

YES

E-E AUDIO (MONO)

DOES NOT APPEAR

Does E-E AUDIO

(STEREO) appear?

Refer to section "E-E AUDIO

(STEREO) DOES NOT APPEAR".

Is the voltage at pin 95

of IC3001 5V?

Change IC3001.

Check J651 and J652 or

J8002.

Change IC701.

Is there audio signal at

pins 9 and 71 or pins 7

and 69 of IC701?

Is there audio signal at

pin 6 of IC701?

Check circuit around of J8001.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-24

YES

E-E AUDIO (STEREO)

DOES NOT APPEAR

Is the voltage at pins 5,

15 and 32 of IC701 5V? Check POWER BLOCK.

Check POWER BLOCK.

Change IC701.

Is there Audio signal at

pins 7, 9, 61 and 71 of

IC701?

Is there Audio signal at

pins 78 and 80 of IC701.

Check circuit around of J8001.

Check J651, J652 and J8002.

Is the voltage at pins

3 and 54 of IC701 9V?

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-25

YES

TUNER AUDIO (MONO)

DOES NOT APPEAR

Does E-E AUDIO

(MONO) appear?

Refer to section "E-E AUDIO

(MONO) DOES NOT APPEAR".

Check circuit around of TU301

at pin 14.

Change IC701.

Check IC701.

Is there signal at pin

57 of IC701?

Is there audio signal at

pin 78 and 80 of IC701?

Is there audio signal

a collector of Q8005

and Q8006?

Check circuit around of J8001.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-26

YES

TUNER AUDIO (STEREO)

DOES NOT APPEAR

Does TUNER AUDIO

(MONO) appear?

Refer to section "TUNER AUDIO

(MONO) DOES NOT APPEAR".

Refer to section "E-E AUDIO

(STEREO) DOES NOT APPEAR".

Does E-E AUDIO

(STEREO) appear?

At the time of channel change,

does the display of a stereo

come out to the screen?

Is there audio signal at

pin 57 of IC701?

Check circuit around

of TU301 at pin 14.

Change IC701.

Check IC701.

Is there audio signal

a emitter of

Q8005 and Q8006?

Check circuit around of J8001.

Change IC701.

Is there audio signal at

pin 78 and 80 of IC701?

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-27

YES

PB AUDIO (Hi-Fi)

DOES NOT APPEAR

Does E-E AUDIO

(STEREO) appear?

Does NORMAL PB

AUDIO appear?

Is there audio signal at

pins 24 and 27 of IC701?

Is there audio signal at

pins 78 and 80 of IC701?

Check circuit around of J8001.

Refer to section "E-E AUDIO

(STEREO) DOES NOT APPEAR".

Refer to section "AT PLAY,

AUDIO DOES NOT APPEAR".

Check circuit of HEAD AMP

and CYLINDER UNIT.

Change IC701.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-28

YES

Hi-Fi AUDIO

CAN NOT RECORD

Does E-E AUDIO appear?

AT state of video recording,

is there audio signal at

pins 7, 9, 69 and 71 of IC701?

Is there audio signal at

pins 78 and 80 of

IC701?

At recording and play, is

there signal at pins 7, 8

and 9 of CP101?

Check IC701.

Check CYLINDER UNIT.

Change IC701.

Check circuit around of J651,

J652, J8002 and TU301.

Refer to section "E-E AUDIO

(MONO) DOES NOT APPEAR".

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-29

YES

DECK DOES NOT ACCEPT

OPEN/CLOSE

Is the voltage at pin 3, 18 and

19 of IC2301 about DC6V ?

Check P.CON +6V line of

POWER BLOCK.

YESIs the lose connection

at CD2302 to DECK ?

Check CP2302 connection

to DECK.

Check loader block.

(DVD SECTION)

NO PLAYBACK PICTURE OF AV

JACK

Check LOADER BLOCK.

Is there voltage

(beam current) at

JG017 and JG019 ?

Yes

Is there VIDEO signal at

pins 183, 184, 186, 187

and 189 of IC4001 ?

Change IC4001.

Yes

Check J8007 and peripheral

circuit.

Is there signal at pins

196, 198, 201, 203, 206

and 208 of IC4001?

Check IC4001 and peripheral

circuit.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-30

NO PLAYBACK PICTURE OF

S-VIDEO JACK

Is there Y signal at

pin 184 of IC4001 ?

YES Check J8008 and

peripheral circuit.

Change IC4001.

NO COLOR PLAYBACK PICTURE

OF S-VIDEO JACK

Is the voltage at pins 34,

80, 109, 147, 158 and 218

of IC4001 about 1.8V?

Check P.CON+3.3V line on

POWER BLOCK.

Change IC4001.

YES

YES Check J8008 and

peripheral circuit.

Is there Y signal at

pin 184 of IC4001?

REFER TO "NO PLAYBACK

PICTURE OF S-VIDEO JACK".

Is there VIDEO signal

at pin 186 of IC4001?

REFER TO "NO PLAYBACK

PICTURE OF AV JACK" .

Is there C signal at

pin 183 of IC4001 ?

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-31

NO AUDIO ON PLAYBACK

Is there AUDIO signal at

pins 7 and 8 of IC8102 ?

YES Check IC8102 and

peripheral circuit.

Change IC4001.

NO DIGITAL AUDIO ON

PLAYBACK OF COAXIAL JACK

Is there waveform at pin 5

of J8006 about 1Vp-p?

Check connection at RCA

Cable.

Yes

Change IC4001.

Is there waveform at

pin 126 of IC4001

about 3Vp-p ?

Check Q8001 and peripheral

circuit.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-32

NO ANALOG AUDIO ON

PLAYBACK

Is there AUDIO signal at

pins 1 and 7 of IC8001 ?

Yes

Is there waveform at pins

1, 2, 3 and 16 of IC8102 ?

Yes

Check J8006 and peripheral

circuit.

Check AT+5V.

Change IC4001.

Yes

Change IC8102.

Is there voltage at pin

6 of IC8102 about 5V ?

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-33

NO HDMI ON PLAYBACK

Check 1.8V and 3.3V line of

IC4001 and peripheral circuit.

Yes

Is there waveform

Q5904 (SCL) and

Q5905 (SDA) ?

Change IC4001.

Yes

Check IC4001 and peripheral

circuit.

Is there voltage at pins

18 and 19 of CP5901?

(Connects with monitor)

Check P.CON 5V line and

peripheral circuit.

Is there voltage at pins 161,

178 of IC4001 about 1.8V

and at pins 166 and 172

about 3.3V ?

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-34

NO USB ON PLAYBACK

Check P.CON 3.3V line of

IC4001 and peripheral circuit.

Is there voltage at pin 65

of IC4001 about 3.3V ?

Yes

Is there waveform

at pins 2 and 3 of

CP6602 ?

Change IC4001.

Yes

Check IC4001 and peripheral

circuit.

Is there voltage at pins 4

and 5 of IC6601 5V. Change IC6601.

Yes

Is there voltage at pins 4

and 5 of CP6602 ? Change CD6601.

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP/HDMI

IC4001

ZR36888HLCG

(Vaddis8)

OPU

SPINDLE/

STEPING/

SLED

MOTOR

HDMI CONNECTOR

CP5901

RF, A, B, C, D, E, F

HOME, TIN_SW, TOUT_SW

DVD LOADER

DM-S/3O

DVD/CD, DVD_LD, CD_LD, VREF(VC), VR/DVD, VR/CD

Motor Drive

IC2301

LA6565VR-TLM-E

TR+/-, FO+/-,

MOT_LD+/-,

MOT_SLED+/-,

MOT_SPDL+/-

SPINDLE/SLED/

FOCUS/TRACK_PWM,

TRAY_CLOSE/OPEN, DRVSB

B, C

DVD BLOCK DIAGRAM

I/TMDS_D2+/-,

I/TMDS_D1+/-,

I/TMDS_D0+/-,

I/TMDS_CLK+/-,

I2CCLK, I2CDAT

SD_D0~D15

64Mbit SDRAM

IC4005

M12L64164A-7TG B

+3.3VREG

IC4003

BA00BC0WFP-E2

VCR BLOCK

DVD-H, P-H/I-L

DAC_A~E_VIDEO

SPDIF

DVD RESET

AUDIO L

AUDIO R

ZERO

2ch Audio DAC

IC8102

PCM1753DBQR

ML, MC, MD,

AMCLK, ABCLK,

ASDATA0

F-1

A--- AT+3.8V

B--- +3.3V

C--- +1.8V

D--- +5V

E--- +A5V

F--- +6V

G--- AT+5.2V

F-2

DVD/CDPD

SD_A0~A11,

RAMCS0/RAMCS1/RAMRAS/RAMCAS/

RAMWE/SD_BA0, RAMCLK, RAMDQM

X4001 +1.8VREG

IC4004

BA00BC0WFP-E2

16Mbit Flash

IC4007

SST39VF1601-70-4C-

EKE

HA0~A20,

HD0~D15,

MEMCS0, MEMCS1,

RD, WR

UBS Current Limitation

IC6601

RT9702-PB

HDMI_DET

CP6601

USB CONNECTOR

CP6603

DVD-H

USB_DN

USB_DP USB_DN,

USB_DP,

HDMI BLOCK

USB BLOCK

A, H

TUNER

TU301

TU_V_OUT

REAR IN JACK

J8002 V

FRONT AV JACK

J653

J652

J651

REAR_V_IN

REAR_A_IN

SIF_OUT

FRONT_A_IN

RF_CONV_A_OUT

IC8002

MM1501XNRE

Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/

HEAD AMP

IC101

LA71206M-MPB-E

NORMAL A_ON/OUT

HIFI/DEMODULATOR

IC701

LA72670BM-L-MPB-E HiFi_AUDIO_OUT

A, C, E

SYSCON/TIMER/SERVO

IC3001

OEC0157B

SW V_OUT

B, F

VIDEO_OUT

Y/C_VIDEO OUT

DVD_A_OUT

DVD_A

DVD_V_OUT

VCR/DVD VIDEO SW

IC8005

MM1501XNRE

OPE AMP

IC8001

RC4580IDR

DVD BLOCK

SPDIF

Y(G)_OUT

U(PB)_OUT

V(PR)_OUT

C_OUT

VREAR OUT JACK

J8001

DVD AUDIO OUT JACK

J8006

COAXIAL

OS8001

OPTICAL

YUV OUT

J8007

S-VIDEO OUT

J8008

A ...P.CON+5V

B ...P.CON+5V (MICON)

C ...P.CON+9V

D ...P.CON+12V

E ...AT+5.2V

F ...AT+5V (MICON)

G ...AT+12.6V

H ...+32V

VCR BLOCK DIAGRAM

F-3 F-4

DMF071A

DEF091A DEF091A

65 129

193

CP5901

IC4001

X4001

CP8101_1

W836

R4042

R4027

IC8102

R4058

R4026

R4025

W826

W824

L8103

W820

W815

C8127

C8112

L8101

L8105

L8104

C8103

W831

C8120

R8101

R8113

R8112

L8102

W818

C8106C8109

W819

W833

CP6602

CP6601

C5901

Q5901

R5904

R5902

R5903

R5905

R5906

D5901

Q5903

R5908

R5901

C4063

B4007 C4062

C4064

IC4007

C4039 R4040 R4044

C4095

R4010

R4018

C4078

R4054

R4053

C4032

C4096

C4050

C4040C4041

R4048

C4021

C4047

R4008

IC4005

C4102

C4086

IC4003 IC4004

R4066

R4080

R4009

R4081

C4053_1

C4009_1

C4110_1

C4011_1

L4001

C4084_1

R4032

R4047

R4067

C4097

W804

W807 C4091

C6606

C4090

C4089

C4100

C4066

R4078 D4004

D4003

R4406

D4002

C2329_1

R2333

R2332

C2341_1

C2340_1

Q2301

B2301

R2306

R2318

B2302

Q2302

R2341

R2340

C2315

C2331

C2328_1

R2355

R2360

C2309

IC2301

CP2302 CP2303

C2313

R2304

C2303

R2303

C2302

C2357

C2359

C2360

C2358

C2310_1

C2314_1

R2305

C2316_1

R2330

R2328

R2310

R2307

R2301

R2308

R2320

R2321

R2326

R2325R2337

R2319

R2324

R2334

R2342

W850

IC6601

C6603

C6605

R5907

C4071_1

R2335

R2339

C4068_1

C4067_1

C4108

C4026

C2346_1

C2343_1

B4010R4071

C8114

C8125

C8126

C8113

R4052

C4098

R2336

CP2301

R4060

CD4002

R4063

R4016

R4045

B6602

C4083

C4051

C4069

Q5902

C4085

W830

R4062

B4013

C4057

W854

CP6603

C4070_1

C4101

C8121

C8119

W817

W809

W810

W838

B4008

R2354

R6614

R6615

L5901

L5902

L5903

L5904

C5902

Q5904

Q5905

R4408

C4027

C4030

C4103

C4081

R4407

C4031

R4012

C4034

C4035

C8108

C8102

C8115

C8111

B8103

C4007

R4001

C8101

C8124

C8110

C8107

C8105

C8104

C8122

B5901

R5910

R5909

C4014

C4013 C4010 C4008

C4016

C4017

C4077

R4051

C4046

C4045

R4059 C4022 B4017

C4109

B4004

C4099

C4038

R4039

R4037

R4038

R4036

R4019

R4020

R4021

C4004

R4022 R4043

C4088

C4052

C4015

C4111

C4012

C4036

C4065

R6606R6605

R4404

R4072

R4402

R2356

Q2303

R2359

Q2305

R2348

Q2304

R2347

R2346

C2348

R2349

C2317

C2306

C2307

C2301

R2313

R2357

R2358

R2329

R2323

R2338

R2327

C2304

D2304

D2303

R2309

C2337

C2365

R2302

C2305

R2352

R2353

D8112

D8111

R6603

C6604

C4076

B4002

B4021

C4087

B4003

C4075

B4016

C4072

B4005

B4020

C4082

R4024

B4015

C4074

B4006

C4107

C4044

B4019

C2347

B2304

C2332

B2303

C2342

C4002

C4080

R4086

R4005

R4004

R4002

R4003 R4061

B4011

C4003

B4012

C4056

C4001

B4009

C4024

C4019

C4029

C4033

R2351

R2350

C4025

C4028

C4023

C4020

C4018

B6601

B4001

W834

D4005

C6602

D6601

C4114

C4117

C4116

R6613

C4120

C4119

R4070

D5902D5903

W837

B4022

W865

C6609 C6610

C4122

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

DVD MT/USB (TOP SIDE) DVD MT (BOTTOM SIDE)

G-1 G-2

Q3006

V651

C3052

Q3005

Q3004

SW655 SW654 SW653

C656

X3001

C3016

C3032

C3013

W024

W056

R3050

L3003

D3007

W079

C3021_1

D3009

W116

CP101

X101

R123

C105

Q104

Q105

L104_1

L102

L107

R137

W136

CP3001

Q3002

SW3001

Q3001

W836

R3002

W071

C3029

L705

Q3008

W099

W101

W075

W184

W072

C3033

W185

W186

C3045

W112

W108

C309

R109

W144

C8031

C136

C138

C135

C110

W102

W041

W034

C652

L8004

W028

C318_1

W174

C174

R3019

D3001

CP103

R3011

W173

W190

W189

C112

W201

W155

W045

W047

W070

W111

R3028

C104

W200

W193

C101

W807

W025

W110

W118

W105

W100

W124

W123

W161

W127

C119_1

L101

OS651

W049

W048

W906

L301

L103

W867

W043

R3012

D3002

C102

W064

C8010_1

C315_1

W042

R706

C313_1

C765

W231

W026

W103

W037

W036

W057

W055

W054

W053

R651

W033 W031

W027

W109

R105

W067

W113

W141

W140

W052

W122

W133

W131

W125

C123

W207

W137

W130

W128

W126

W162

W160

W158

W156

W083

W082

W080

R140

W167

W150

R144

W152

W153

W134

W159

W147

W148

W202

W139

W132

W199

W195

C763

C767

C758

C755_1

C751

R723

C740_1W237

C731

R704 C722

W229

C721_1

W230

C720_1

C713

R703

C719

R702

R712

C759

R719

C152

C753

C750_1

C728 C716

C712

C725

C756

C726

C727

C742

W236

W191

OS8001

C8062_1

C8063_1

W019

L8001

L8002

R513

R553

D526

Q504

R514

Q503 C521

W827

R533

D514

C505

L505

D516

R554

C504

D527

W816

C501

D507

IC501

D522

C522

R517

D523

C514

IC502

C506

T501

Q501

HS501

FH502

F501

FH501

S501

C653

D656

R501

D502

D505

D506

D503

R503

R512

D509

B501

C513

R516

C515

R502

W017

C525 R506

R508

D510

Q502

R505

IC503

C509

R504

W013

D504

D524

D512

D501

C512Q507

R529

R549

D518

D511

C518

W092

W091

W166

C8032

D8004

W021

D8005

C8034

D8006

C8004_1

W098

C8013

Q8004

W164

W001

R509

W008

W011

W004

W076

W044

W003

R530

W032

W058

W050

W077

C8003_1

D8001

R8011

W095

W094

W151

W801

W121

C8042

W143

W142

CP102_1

W203

W196

R724

W197

W198

W227

W228

W187

TP101

TP701

TP3001

TP3002

W224

W226

W194

W232

W235

W221

R729

R728

W220

W214

W222 L701

L704

W119

W179

W120

R3015

C516

C526

W175

W178

L703

C735

C3023

W081

W114

W117

W208

W225

W188

W211

W212

W210

W217

W218

W219

L501

R3016

W168

W170

W062

W093

W163

W819

W104

L702

D519

W051

W046

W238

W845

C502_1

W223

R527

W002

W138

W206

C8005

R710

R718

S502

W018

W014

TU301

J651

J8007

J8006

J8001

J8002

C8035

C8038

W061

W065

W165

W172

L8009

W007

W005

W022

W073

W085

W084

R8009

W089

W074

R534

W060

L8007

W068

W063

W169

W171

W149

R8004

W023

R8036

W012

W192

W205

D508

R8059

W215

C115

C131

C142

C163

C531

C8022

C8024

C8075_1

C8043

L8008

W204

L506

W213

C511_1

C540_1

W016

W097

R8053

C8051

C8037

W182

W820

W157

W821

C8036

Q505

Q510

D529

D686

D685

SW691

SW686

SW689

SW685

SW687

SW690

R692

R695

R693

R689

R691

R697

R686

R699

CP683

SW697

R698

C3000

SW699

R700

W886

HS502

R8033

C8015_1

C8048

W020

C600

C8047_1

CP8001_1

W881

W241

W242

W243

W145

C535

W246

W245

CP653

R535

W239

W066

W146

W216

R8029

R8028

W078

W833

W832

W804

W834

W135

W090

W069

J653 J652

J8008

CP651_1

CP682

CP501_1

C519

D515_1

W885

W817

W815

W835

W852

W839

W840

W837

W838

R8047

W879

W806

W829

W850

W842

W841

D533

W822

W877

W826

C8040_1

CD501

W880

W846

W856

W847

S801X

S801Y

S802X

S802Y

W183

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

VCR MT/OPERATION/OPERATION2 (INSERTED PARTS)

SOLDER SIDE

DME063A

DEE079A

DEE080A

DEE081A

RISK OF FIRE - REPLACE AS MARKED .

G-3 G-4

61 1

C3005

IC3001

C3006

Q664

Q655 Q652

Q663

R662

R663

R665

R667

R672

R673

R675

R3087

R3037

R3034

C3024

C3025 C3009

R3004

R3063

R3053

C3034C3049

C3038

R3043

C3001

Q662

Q660

Q654

R669

Q659

R670

Q651

R3025

C3044

R3022

R3027

C3018

C3031

C3019

C3015

R3030

C3022

R3020

R3017 R3007

C3010

R3014

C3007

R3031

R3008

R3001

R3032

R3049

R3051

C3030

C3036

R108

R103

R102

R101

IC101

C169

C166

C162

C165

R142

C154

C156

R127

C141

Q109

C144

R132

C145

R133 C147

R131

Q107

C139

C127

C126

C125

R117

R116

C109

C106

C107

R107

C116

R110

R115

C121

C122

R114

R111

R112

C118

R122

C143

Q103

C158

C108

R106

C114

R139

R138

R664

C3027

C3065

R3047

R3046

R3062

C3050 R3033

C3053

C3020 C3008

R3003

R3057

C3017

R3006

R3056

C655

C654

C3061

R3044

R3045

R301

C302

C317

C307

R302

C303

R3010

R3083

Q656

R668

Q657

Q658

R674

Q661

Q665

C8057

Q666

Q101

Q102

R304

R129

R3026

C3040

R666

Q653

R661

R113

C117

R124

C133

R3009

Q3007

Q3003

C129

R141

R683

C3041

R136

R3035

R3055

R671

R126

R119

C160

C3002

R3021

C124

C137

C134

C120

C132

C146

C148

C151

R3038

IC701

C762

R727

C768

C771

R726

C704

R725

C766

R731

C764

C760

C752

C748

C702

R722

R721

C749

R720

C744

R714

C741

C730

C724

C733

C708

R708

R717

R716

C701

R713

C706

R707

C703

R715

C711

R711

C710

C717 C723

C718

C757

C754

C739

C747

C709

C743

C732

C715

R701

C714

C705

C707

C746

C8058

R8001

R8010

C8055

C8054

C8060

Q514

Q513

R552

Q506

R523

C534

R511

Q509

R515

R536

C520

R519

R518

R521

R520

R522

C524

R532

C508

R507

C527

R531

R547

C510

C8028

R8012

R8008

R8007

C8025

R8006

R8005

Q8001

B8001

R8054

R8002

R8003

C8023

Q8008

Q8009

R8022

Q8010

R8023

Q8011 Q8012

R8027

R8026

C8033

R8024

R8025

C8056

R8046

R8042

R8039

R8049 R8034

C8014

Q8003

R8014

R8015

Q8006

Q8005

R8016

R8017

Q8007

C8008

C8009

C544

Q8002

C308

R3036

C8059

C3004

C3014

C3066

C140

IC8002

IC8005

IC3003

R676

R306

R8040

R8037

Q8020

Q8021

Q8022

Q8019

C8046

C161

C8050

C8044

R8035

C8049

R8057

R8051

R8045

R8030

R8031

R8013

R8055

R8052

C8065

R8041

R8050

R8038

C8064

C8045

R8048

R8021

IC3099_1

IC8001

C3035

R678

R677

R524

C8021

W800

W808

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

VCR MT (CHIP MOUNTED PARTS)

SOLDER SIDE

G-5 G-6

DME063A

DEE079A

DEE080A DEE081A

SW1

CD2302

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

LOADING MOTOR (INSERTED PARTS)

SOLDER SIDE LOADING MOTOR (CHIP MOUNTED PARTS)

SOLDER SIDE

DD00

BLUE

SW2

CD2301

M2602M2601

G-7 G-8

ABC D E F GH

IC4001

ZR36888HLCG

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP/HDMI IC

101102 103 104105 106 107108 109 110111 112 113 114 115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128

129130 131 132133 134 135136 137 138139 140 141 142 143 144 145146 147 148149 150 151152 153 154155 156 157158 159 160161 162 163164 165 166167 168 169170 171 172173 174 175176 177 178179 180 181182 183 184185 186 187 188189 190 191192

193194195196197198199200201202203204205206207208209210211212213214215216217218219220221222223224225226227228229230231232233234235236237238239240

241242243244245246247248249

250251

252

253254

255256

110

100

111213141516171819 22021222324

2526272829 3

30313233343536373839 4

40414243444546474849 5

51525354

56575859 6

6061626364

65 66 67 68 69

70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79

80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89

90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99

TP4015

TP4012

TP4013

TP4010

JG4006

JG4009

JG4007

JG4008

JG4012

JG029

TP4005

TP4004

TP4006

JG4005

JG4015

JG4029

JG4032

JG4014

JG4001

JG4002

JG4003

JG001

JG002

JG003

JG004

JG005

JG006

JG007

JG008

JG009

JG4016

JG4017

JG4028

JG4027

JG4026

JG4025

JG4023

JG4022

JG4021

JG4020

JG4019

JG4024

JG4030

JG4031

TP4022

TP4014

TP4020

TP4021

TP4027

TP4028

JG4011

JG4010

JG4004

TP4009

TP4008

TP4003

TP4007

JG4013

TP4011

JG4018

IC4004

BA00BC0WFP

REG+1.8V IC

12 456

IC4003

BA00BC0WFP

REG+3.3V IC

12 456

CD4002

CH2D1101

B4021

MMZ1608R102CT

B4012 MMZ1608R102CT

B4009

MMZ1608

R102CT

B4016

MMZ1608R102CT

B4011

MMZ1608R102CT

B4013

MMZ1608R102CT

B4002

MMZ1608R102CT

B4020

MMZ1608

R102CT

B4015

MMZ1608R102CT

B4022 MMZ1608R102CT

B4006

MMZ1608R102CT

B4010

MMZ1608R102CT

B4004

MMZ1608R102CT

B4005

MMZ1608R102CT

B4001

MMZ1608R102CT

B4017

MMZ1608R102CT

B4003

MMZ1608R102CT

B4019

MMZ1608R102CT

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTION

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

ARE

D4002 1SS355

D4004 1SS355

D4003 1SS355

D4005

1SS355

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

C4110_1

4716V KA

C4089 10010V KA

C4090 10010V KA

C4100 10010V KA

C4011_1

1006.3V KA

C4051

1006.3V KA

C4026

1006.3V KA

C4083

1006.3V KA

C4078

1006.3V KA

C4102

1006.3V KA

C4053_1

1006.3V KA

C4009_1

16V KA

C4122

0.1 B

C4111

0.1 F

C4034 8P CH

C4114

0.001 B

C4072

0.1 F

C4091

100P CH

C4036 0.1 B

C4097 0.01 B

C4065 0.01 B

C4035 15P CH

C4107

0.1 F

C4080 0.01 B

C4056

0.027 B

C4033 0.1 F

C4002

0.1 F

C4001

0.0012 B

C4117

100P CH

C4003

0.027 B

C4116 100P CH

C4088 1 B

C4004 0.1 F

C4085 0.001 B

C4086 0.001 B

C4087

0.1 F

C4027 0.1 F

C4028 0.1 F

C4081 0.1 F

C4031 0.01 B

C4103

0.1 F

C4098

10P CH

C4119

2.2 B

C4012

0.1 F

C4082

0.1 F

C4044

0.1 F

C4074

0.1 F

C4120

0.001 B

C4109

0.1 F

C4077

0.1 F

C4032

0.001 B

C4096

0.001 B

C4038

0.01 B

C4008

0.1 F

C4010

0.1 F

C4013

C4014

0.1 F

C4016 0.1 F

C4024 1 B

C4025 0.1 F

C4020 0.1 F

C4019 1B

C4023 0.1 F

C4017 0.1 F

C4030 1 B

C4007 0.1 F

C4057

180P CH

C4029 0.1 F

C4066

C4018 0.1 F

C4076

0.1 F

C4075

0.1 F

C4052

0.1 F

C4015

0.1 F

C4022 0.1 F

R4047

330 +-1%

R4067

3.9K +-1%

R4012

R4045 4.7K

R4001 390 +-1%

R4080

5.6K

+-1%

R4061 11K

R4062 39K

R4060

11K

R4063

15K

R4406

4.7K

R4078

4.7K

R4019 33

R4020 33

R4021 33

R4402 4.7K

R4404

4.7K

R4043

10K +-1%

R4022

10K

+-1%

R4070

75 +-1%

R4408

430 +-1%

R4016

100

R4042 100

R4026 220

R4027 220

R4407 4.7K

R4071

150

R4024 4.7K

R4054

R4053

R4051

4.7K

R4036

4.7K

R4037

4.7K

R4039

4.7K

R4038

4.7K

R4059 100

R4008 100

R4025 220

R4005 75 +-1%

R4004 75 +-1%

R4003 75 +-1%

R4058

220

R4052

4.7K

R4072

R4010 33

R4018 33

R4066

10K

R4009

1K+-1%

R4032

1.5K +-1%

R4081

3.9K +-1%

R4086 75 +-1%

R4002 75 +-1%

C4084_1

476.3V KA

C4101

10010V

C4108

1006.3V KA

C4068_1

100

6.3V KA

C4069

6.3V

C4067_1

476.3V KA

C4071_1

476.3V KA

C4070_1

2206.3V YK

W830

W850

W834

W817

W804

W865

W836

W807

X4001

100BT02701

27MHz

L4001

2.2uH 0305

DUPTD1

DUPRD1

DUPTD0

DUPRD0

OPU_F

OPU_E

OPU_D

OPU_C

OPU_B

SYS_MUTE

P.CON+5V

SLED_PWM

DRVSB

DVD_LD

CD_LD

DUPTD1

P-H/I-L

FOCUS_PWM

DVD/CD

HDMI_DET

SPDL_SENS+

SPDL_SENS-

OPU_A

TRAY_OPEN

DVD/CDPD

SPINDLE_PWM

AMCLK

P.CON+3.3V

TRACK_PWM

ABCLK

ALRCLK

DAC_VIDEO_C

DAC_VIDEO_B

DAC_VIDEO_D

UNREG+3.8V

DAC_VIDEO_A

DAC_VIDEO_E

BOOT2

BOOT1 ML

P.CON+5V

DUPTD1

P-H/I-L

DUPRD1

IRRCV

GND

DUPTD0

RESET

DUPRD0 ASDATA0

D1_1 VDDAFERF

P.CON+5V

GND

+1.8V

TRAY_OPEN

+3.3V

TRAY_CLOSE

D1_2

RFINN

RFINP

VDDPWM3.3V

VDDDAC

HOME

TOUT_SW

TIN_SW TIN_SW

DVD/CD

TRAY_CLOSE

DRVSB

DAC_VIDEO_C OPU_A

DAC_VIDEO_B OPU_B

OPU_C

TOUT_SW DAC_VIDEO_D

GND OPU_D

DAC_VIDEO_A

P.CON+3.3V OPU_E

DAC_VIDEO_E OPU_F

SPDL_SENS-

HA0 SPDL_SENS+

HA1 DVD/CDPD

HA2 DVD_LD

HA3 HA15 CD_LD

HA4 SPINDLE_PWM

HA5 HA16

SLED_PWM

HA6 HA14 HDVCC+1.8V

TRACK_PWM

HA7 HA13 FOCUS_PWM

HA8 HA12 P.CON+A5V

HA9 P.CON+3.3V

HA10 HD15

VCC+6V

HA11 HA11 I/TMDS_D2+

HA12 M_GND

HD7 I/TMDS_D2-

HA13 P.CON+5V

HDVCC+3.3V

HA14 P.CON+3.3V

HA15 HA10 I/TMDS_D1+

GND

HA16 HD14 I/TMDS_D1-

HA17 HA9

HA18 HD6 I/TMDS_D0+ I2CDAT

HA19

HA20 HA8 I/TMDS_D0- I2CCLK

HD0 HDMI_DET

HD13

HD1 I/TMDS_D2+

HD5 I/TMDS_CLK+

HD2 I/TMDS_D2-

I/TMDS_CLK-

HD3 I/TMDS_D1+

HD4 I/TMDS_D1-

HD5 I/TMDS_D0+

HD12

HD6 I/TMDS_D0-

HD7 I/TMDS_CLK+

HD4

HD8 I/TMDS_CLK-

HD9 USB_DP

HD10 HD11 USB_DN

HD11 HD3 AT+5.2V

HD12 VCC+6V

HA19

HD13 RESET

HD14

HD15 HD10

HA18

MEMCS0

WR HD2

SD_A0 HA17

SD_A1 HD9 DUPRD1

SD_A2 HA7

SD_A3

SD_A4 HD1 RX

SD_A5 HA6

SD_A6 HD8

SD_A7 VCC+6V

HA5

SD_A8 P.CON+A5V

SD_A9

SD_A10 HD0 P.CON+5V

SD_A11 HA4

SD_D0 RD

SD_D1

SD_D2 HA3 SPDIF

SD_D3 HA2 SYS_MUTE

SD_D4 MEMCS0 HOME AT+5.2V

SD_D5 HA1

SD_D6

SD_D7 HA0 UNREG+3.8V

SD_D8 AMCLK

SD_D9

SD_D10 DVD-H

ABCLK

SD_D11

SD_D12 I2CDAT ALRCLK

SD_D13 I2CCLK P.CON+3.3V

SD_D14

SD_D15

RAMCS0#

RAMRAS#

RAMCAS#

SD_BA0

RAMDQM

RAMWE# UNREG+3.8V

RAMCLK

P.CON+3.3V

RAMCAS#

BOOT1

BOOT2

RAMCS0#

RAMCS1#

RAMRAS#

SD_BA0

RAMWE#

RAMDQM

SD_D11

SD_A11

RAMCLK

SD_D10

SD_D5

SD_D12

SD_D13

SD_D14

SD_D15

SD_D0

USB_DP

USB_DN

SD_A4

SD_A3

SD_A5

SD_A2

SD_A6

SD_A1

SD_A7

SD_A0

SD_A10

SD_D8

SD_D7

SD_D9

SD_D6

SD_D4

SD_D3

SD_D2

SD_D1

SD_A8

SD_A9

ASDATA0

SPDIF

EN GND VOVCC ADJ

FROM/TO HDMI/USB

FROM/TO MOTOR DRIVE

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

H-2

H-1

FROM/TO POWER

DVD/VR 130mm

DVD COMBO 250mm

(CP501_1)

GPCI/O[52]

GPCI/O[54]

GPCI/O[53]

GPCI/O[57]

SSCCLK / GPCI/O[59]

SSCTXD / GPCIO[60]

SSCRXD / GPCIO[17]

MEMCS[1]

VDDP

MEMAD[15]

MEMAD[16]

MEMAD[14]

MEMAD[13]

MEMAD[12]

MEMDA[15]

MEMDA[7]

MEMAD[11]

GNDP

MEMAD[10]

MEMDA[6]

MEMAD[8]

MEMDA[13]

MEMDA[5]

MEMAD[20]

MEMDA[14]

VDDP

MEMDA[12]

MEMWR/

MEMDA[4]

VDDC

MEMDA[11]

MEMDA[3]

MEMAD[19]

GNDC

MEMDA[10]

MEMAD[18]

MEMDA[2]

MEMAD[17]

MEMDA[9]

MEMAD[7]

MEMDA[1]

MEMAD[6]

MEMDA[8]

MEMAD[5]

VDDP

MEMDA[0]

MEMAD[4]

MEMAD[3]

MEMAD[2]

MEMAD[1]

MEMAD[0]

GNDP

VDD-IP

VDDP

RAMCKE

GPCI/O[61]

GPCI/O[62]

RAMADD[3]

RAMADD[5]

RAMADD[2]

RAMADD[6]

VDDP

RAMADD[1]

RAMADD[7]

RAMADD[0]

GNDP

RAMADD[8]

VDDC

RAMADD[10]

GNDC

RAMADD[9]

VDDP

RAMADD[11]

RAMBA[0]

GNDP

RAMCS[0]/

RAMCS[1]/

RAMRAS/

RAMCAS/

VDDP

RAMWE/

RAMDQM

GNDPCLK

PCLK

VDDPCLK

RAMDAT[8]

GNDP

RAMDAT[7]

RAMDAT[9]

RAMDAT[6]

VDDP

RAMDAT[10]

RAMDAT[5]

RAMDAT[11]

GNDP

RAMDAT[4]

VDDC

RAMDAT[12]

GNDC

RAMDAT[3]

VDDP

RAMDAT[13]

RAMDAT[2]

RAMDAT[14]

GNDP

RAMDAT[1]

RAMDAT[15]

RAMDAT[0]

VDDP

ALRCLK

ABCLK

GNDP-A2

AMCLK

VDDP-A2

ADPWMP[2]

GPCI/O[20]

GPCI/O[25]

GNDP

ADPWMN[2]

VDDP

ADPWMP[3]

ADPWMN[3]

ADPWMP[4]

ADPWMN[4]

GNDC

VDDC

ADPWMP[5]

ADPWMN[5]

ADPWMP[6]

ADPWMN[6]

ADPWMP[7]

ADPWMN[7]

VDDP

GNDP

GNDA

RESET/

VDDA

GCLKP

AHVDD

AHGND

AGNDP

HDTXCN

HDTXCP

AVDDP

HDTXDN0

HDTXDP0

AGNDP

HDTXDN1

HDTXDP1

AVDDP

HDTXDN2

HDTXDP2

AGNDP

HDCSET

AGNDC

GNDDACD

DAC6

VDDDACD

DAC5

DAC4

VDDDAC

DAC3

DAC2

VDDDAC

DAC1

RSET

GNDDACP

GNDDABS2

VDDAFE

ADCIN[B]

VDDSAFE

VDDAFE

ADCIN[C]

ADCIN[H]

ADCIN[D]

ADCIN[J]

GNDADC

ADCIN[E]

ADCIN[K]

ADCIN[F]

OPUREF

BGCAP

RESLOAD

CDMD

DVDMD

CDLD

DVDLD

GNDAFER

GNDADC

VDDC

GNDC

ICGPCI/O[4]

ICGPCI/O[5]

VDDP

GNDP

VDD-IP

PWMCO[2]

GPCI/O[44]

GNDPWMS

PWMCO[4]

VDDPWMS

GPCI/O[46]

DUPRD0

DUPTD0

DUPRD1

DUPTD1

VDDP

GPCI/O[40]

GPCI/O[42]

GPCI/O[33]

GPCI/O[34]

GPCI/O[48]

GPCI/O[49]

GPCI/O[50]

IDGPCI/O[5]

VDDUSB

USBDP

USBDN67

GNDUSB

RAMADD[4]

GPCI/O[51]253

254

255

256 GNDP

193

194

195

196

RFINP

RFINN

ADCIN[A]

MEMAD[9]

MEMRD/

MEMCS[0]/

PWMCI[6]

PWMCI[0]

GPCI/O[47]

GPCI/O[16]

CPUNMI

GNDP

ADPWMP[0]

IDGPCIO[0]

AOUT[2] / ADPWMN[0]

AOUT[1] / ADPWMP[1]

126

127

128

S/PDIFOUT

129

130

AOUT[0]/ADPWMN[1]

GPCI/O[65]

AVDDT18

(MUTE-L)

(VR_CD)

(VR_DVD)

(DVD-L/CD-H)

(DVD MT PCB)

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

EN GND VOVCC ADJ

PCB130

DMF071

FROM/TO MEMORY

(D_GND)

GND(M)

P.CON+A5V

GND(A)

GND(D)

SPDIF

SSCCLK/TX

RDY(I/O(0))/RX

P.CON+6V

AT+5.2V

UNREG+3.8V

(W803)

(A_GND)

ABC D E F GH

IC4005 M12L64164A-7TG

64M SDRAM IC

110111213141516171819 22021222324252627

28 29

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

50 51 52 53 54

6789

IC4007 SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE

FLASH IC 16M IC

110111213141516171819 22021222324

25 26 27 28 29

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

56789

JG4033

JG4034

JG4035

B4007

MMZ1608R102CT

B4008

MMZ1608R102CT

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

C4045

0.1 F

C4050

0.1 F

C4046

0.1 F

C4047

0.1 F

C4041

0.1 F

C4040

0.1 F

C4095

0.01 B

C4099

0.01 B

C4039

0.1 F

C4064

0.1 F

C4062

0.1 F

R4048

47K

R4044

4.7K

R4040

4.7K

C4021

1006.3V KA

C4063

2206.3V KA

W837

W838

W854

SD_A0

SD_A1

SD_A2

SD_A3 HA16 HA15

SD_A4

SD_A5

SD_A6 HA14

SD_A7

SD_A8

SD_A9 HA13

SD_A10

SD_A11

SD_D0 HD15 HA12

SD_D1 SD_D15 SD_D0

SD_D2

SD_D3 HD7 HA11

SD_D4

SD_D5 SD_D14 SD_D1

SD_D6 HD14 HA10

SD_D7 SD_D13 SD_D2

SD_D8

SD_D9 HD6 HA9

SD_D10

SD_D11 SD_D12 SD_D3

SD_D12 HD13 HA8

SD_D13 SD_D11 SD_D4

SD_D14

SD_D15 HD5 HA19

RAMCS0#

RAMRAS# SD_D10 SD_D5

RAMCAS# HD12 HA20

SD_BA0 SD_D9 SD_D6

RAMDQM

RAMWE# HD4 WR

RAMCLK

SD_D8 SD_D7

RESET

HA0

HA1 HD11 RAMDQM

HA2

HA3 RAMDQM RAMWE#

HA4 HD3

HA5 RAMCLK RAMCAS#

HA6

HA7 HD10 HA19 RAMRAS#

HA8

HA9 RAMCS1#

HA10 HD2 HA18

HA11 SD_A11 SD_BA0

HA12

HA13 HD9 HA17 SD_A9 RAMCS0#

HA14

HA15 SD_A8 SD_A10

HA16 HD1 HA7

HA17 SD_A7 SD_A0

HA18

HA19 HD8 HA6 SD_A6 SD_A1

HA20

HD0 SD_A5 SD_A2

HD1 HD0 HA5

HD2 SD_A4 SD_A3

HD3

HD4 RD HA4

HD5

HD6

HD7 HA3

HD8

HD9

HD10 FLASHCS HA2

HD11

HD12

HD13 HA0 HA1

HD14

HD15

MEMCS0

P.CON+3.3V

GND

RESET

MEMCS0

PCB130

DMF071

H-4H-3

FROM AUDIO/VIDEO

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

DQ15

DQ7

DQ14

DQ6

DQ13

DQ5

DQ12

DQ11

DQ3

DQ10

DQ2

DQ9

DQ1

DQ8

DQ0

CE#

DQ4

VCCQ A14

A13

A12

A11

A18

A17

A10

A19

A20

RP#

VPP

WP#

A19

WE#

A15A16

VCC

OE#

GND

VDD

DQ0

VDDQ

DQ1

DQ2

VSSQ

DQ3

DQ4

VDDQ

DQ5

VSSQ

DQ6

DQ7

VDD

LDQM

CAS

RAS

BA0

BA1

A10/AP

VDD

VSS

DQ15

VSSQ

DQ14

DQ13

VDDQ

DQ12

DQ11

VSSQ

DQ10

DQ9

VDDQ

DQ8

VSS

UDQM

CLK

CKE

A11

VSS

DEBUG MODE

MEMORY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DVD MT PCB)

ABC D E F GH

CP2302

00_6232_005_006_800+

CP2303

00_6232_006_006_800+

CP2301

LD07T2-24ND-03

IC2301 LA6565VR-TLM-E

MOTOR DRIVE IC

1 1011121314151617 18 192 20 21 22

23242526272829

30313233343536373839

4041424344

56789

TP2316

TP2317

JG057

TP2320

JG012

TP2318

TP2319

TP2324

TP2323

TP2304

TP2305

TP2303

TP2307

JG017

TP2308

JG019

JG018

TP2306

TP2322

TP2321

TP2310

TP2309

TP2311

TP2312

JG058

TP2313

TP2315

TP2314

JG056

JG016

JG010

JG011

JG040

JG013

JG014

JG015

B2301

MMZ1608R102CT

B2302

MMZ1608R102CT

B2303

MMZ1608R102CT

B2304

MMZ1608R102CT

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION :SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTION

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

ARE

D2304 1SS355

D23031SS355

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

C2304

0.022 BC2365

0.1 B

C2305

0.1 B

C2307 0.1 B

C2348

C2359

100P CH C2360

100P CH

C2309

0.1 B

C2337

0.1 F

C2357

100P CH C2358

100P CH

C2313

0.1 B

C2301

0.1 F

C2303 0.1 B

C2302 0.1 B

C2347

0.1 F

C2331

0.1 F

C2315

0.1 F

C2342

0.1 F

C2332

0.1 F

C2306 0.1 F

C2317

0.1 F

R2354

3.3K

R2357 1K

R2358 120

R2302

100 +-1%

R2330

R2313

4.7K

R2359

R2341

6.8

R2340

6.8

R2338

4.7K

R2310

4.7K

R2326

5.6K

R2321

27K

R2339

1.2K

R2324

R2342

4.7K

R2350

4.7K

R2353

100

R2351

4.7K

R2352

100

R2334

10K

R2318

6.8

R2333

220

R2332

220

R2306

6.8

R2347

3.3K

R2346

3.3K

R2356

R2349

100

R2337

10K

R2308

10K

R2301

R2307

75K

R2305

10K

R2319

33K

R2327

4.7K

R2304 2.2

R2303 2.2

R2323

1.2

R2329

1.2

R2328

4.7K

R2325

6.8K

R2355

R2348

3.3K

R2360

R2309

100 +-1%

R2320

4.7K

R2336

390

R2335 5.6K

C2328_1

476.3V KA

C2310_1

10010V KA

C2314_1

10010V KA

C2340_1

1006.3V KA

C2341_1

100

6.3V KA

C2346_1

6.3V KA

C2343_1

476.3V KA

C2329_1

476.3V KA

C2316_1

476.3V KA

Q2303

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

VR DVD

Q2304

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

DVD/CD

Q2305

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

VR DVD

Q2301

KTA1505S

-Y-RTK/P

DVD LDCTL

Q2302

KTA1544T-RTK/P

CD LD CTL

DVD/CD

DVD_LD

CD_LD

DVD/CDPD

DVD/CD

DVD_LD

CD_LD

DVD/CDPD

OPU_A

OPU_B

OPU_C

OPU_D

OPU_E

TR- OPU_F

TR+

HOME

FO- GND

FO+ GND

DVD/CDPD

TOUT_SW

TIN_SW

VR/DVD RF_A5V P.CON+A5V

TRACK_PWM

FOCUS_PWM

DVDLD

P.CON+3.3V

CDLD

VR/CD

VDDPWM3.3V

DRVSB

DVD/CDPD TRACK_PWM

DVD_CD

OPU_C

SPINDLE_PWM

OPU_B

OPU_A SLED_PWM

FOCUS_PWM

OPU_D

VCC+6V

OPU_F

OPU_E

SPDL_SENS+

SPDL_SENS-

TRAY_CLOSE

OPU_VREF TRAY_OPEN

M_GND

MOT_LD-

MOT_LD+

TOUT_SW

TIN_SW

P.CON+3.3V

HOME

MOT_SLED-

MOT_SLED+

MOT_SPDL-

MOT_SPDL+

MOT_SLED-

MOT_SPDL-

MOT_SLED+

MOT_LD+

MOT_LD-

TR+

TR-

FO+

FO-

FROM/TO LOADER

GND(PDIC)

MON(DVD)

NC(SW)

VOL(DVD)

GND(DVD)

LD(DVD)

LD(CD)

VOL(CD)

GND(CD)

MON(COM)

VCC

Vref

F-

F+

T-

T+

DVD/CD

GND(D)

LD-

LD+

OPEN

TO LOADER

PCB130

DMF071

H-6H-5

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

NC NC NC NC NC

DM3S/3O

3.9

4.5

1.0

4.5

3.9

1.0

(RF_GND)

0.7

SP1-

SP1+

SLD+

SLD-

LIMIT SW

SW(GND)

FROM/TO LOADER

FWD

REV

VCC2

VLD-

VLD+

VD4+

VD4-

VD3+

VD3-

VD2+

VD2-

VD1-

VD1+

VCC1

VCCS

VIN1+A

VIN1-A

VIN 1

VO_OP

VIN3

VIN3-

VIN2

VIN2-

VIN2+

VIN-OP

VIN+OP

REG-IN

REG-OUT

VREF-OUT

VREF-IN

VIN4

VIN4-

MUTE234

MUTE1

VCONT

S-GND

PGND1

PGND2

NCNC

VC2

(VR_CD/VR_DVD)

0.7

0.1

MOTOR DRIVE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DVD MT PCB)

ABC D E F GH

IC8102 PCM1753DBQR

STEREO DAC IC

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

234

5678

TP8101

TP8114

TP8113

TP8112

TP8110

TP8109

TP8108

TP8107

TP8105

TP8106

TP8102

TP8115

TP8103

B8103

MMZ1608R102CT

CP8101_1

IMSA-9604S-16F

D8112

1SS355

D8111 1SS355

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

C8122

0.001 B

C8114

C8125

C8113

C8126

C8105

12P CH

C8104

150P CH

C8106

150P CH

C8107

150P CH

C8109

150P CH

C8108

12P CH

C8124

150P CH

C8127

150P CH

C8115

12P CH

C8110

150P CH

C8112

150P CH

C8111

12P CH

C8101

100P CH

C8103

33P CH

C8102

12P CH

C8120

0.1 F

R8113

470

R8112

470

R8101

C8119

10010V YK

C8121

10010V YK

W815

W818

W819

W820W831

W833

W826

W824

L8103

1uH 0305

L8102

1uH 0305

L8105

1uH 0305

L8104

1uH 0305

L8101

1uH 0305

DAC_VIDEO_A

DAC_A_VIDEO

DAC_C_VIDEO

DAC_VIDEO_C

DAC_B_VIDEO

DAC_D_DVD_VIDEO

DAC_VIDEO_A DAC_E_VIDEO

DAC_VIDEO_C

DAC_VIDEO_B DAC_VIDEO_B

DAC_VIDEO_D

DAC_VIDEO_E

P.CON+5V

RESET DAC_VIDEO_D

MC DAC_E_VIDEO

AMCLK

ABCLK DVD-H

ALRCLK

ASDATA0 P-H/I-L

DAC_VIDEO_E

P-H/I-L

DAC_A_VIDEO

DVD-H

SYS_MUTE RESET

ZERO

R_AUDIO

L_AUDIO

DAC_B_VIDEO

GND

DAC_C_VIDEO

DAC_D_DVD_VIDEO

SYS_MUTE

RESET

ASDATA0

AMCLK

ABCLK

ALRCLK

ZERO

FROM/TOTUNER/JACK

H-8H-7

TO MEMORY

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

PCB130

DMF071

0NC

SCK

ZEROL/NA

ZEROR/ZEROA

VCOM

AGND VOUTR

VOUTL

VCC

VDD

DGND

LRCK

DATA

BCK

1.61.11.63.34.92.5

2.4

3.3 0 0 0 3.3 1.7

CVBS/G/Y

CVBS/C

C/B/U

Y/R/V

CVBS

Y(G)

U(B)

GND

V(R)

GND

AUDIO-L

GND

AUDIO-R

ZERO

GND

DVD-H

DVD CVBS

DVD RESET

GND

AUDIO/VIDEO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DVD MT PCB)

P-H/I-L

(CP8001_1)

ABC D E F GH

CP5901

1903015-3

HDMI CONNECTOR

L5904

ACM2012H-900-2P

L5901

ACM2012H-900-2P

L5902

ACM2012H-900-2P

L5903

ACM2012H-900-2P

D5903

AVRL161A1R1NT

D5902

AVRL161A1R1NT

CP6603

C33F-004-5079A

CP6601

A2001WR2-5P

CP6602

A2001WR2-5P

GQ5904

2SK3018T106

LEVEL_CONV

Q5905

2SK3018T106

LEVEL_CONV

B6602

HCB2012K-600T25

B6601

HCB2012K-600T25

B5901

MMZ1608R102CT

IC6601 RT9702-PB

USB CUTIENT LIMITATION

123

D6601

RB051L-40

D5901

1SS355

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

C5901

1025V KA

C6602

0.1 F

C6610

68P CH

C6609

68P CH

C5902 0.1 F

C6604

0.1 F

R6613

10K

R6606

15K

R6605

15K

R6603

100K

R5909

1.8K

R6615

R6614

R5910

1.8K

R5907

4.7K

R5908

4.7K

R5906

R5905

R5903

R5904

10K

R5902

R5901

10K

C6605

1025V KA

C6606

476.3V KA

C6603

1025V KA

Q5903

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

HDMI 5V REG

Q5901

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

HDMI DET

W809

W810

Q5902

KTA1281_Y

HDMI 5V REG

I/TMDS_D2+

I/TMDS_D2-

AT+5.2V

DVD-H

I/TMDS_D1+ USB_DN

I/TMDS_D1- USB_DP

I/TMDS_D0+

I/TMDS_D0-

I/TMDS_CLK+

I/TMDS_CLK-

VCC+6V VCC+6V

I2CCLK

I2CDAT

HDMI_DET

GND

P.CON+3.3V

P.CON+5V

GND

D2+

D0-

CLK+

SDA

GND

POWER

D2-S

D2-

D1+

D1-S

D1-

D0+

D0-S

CLK-S

CLK-

CEC

SCL

HOTPLUG

+5V

GND

USB_DN

USB_DP

(CP6602)

GND

USB_DN

USB_DP

+5V

H-10H-9

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

(HDVCC+3.3V)

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

(USB PCB)

PCB130

DMF071

5.0

9.0 5.0

5.09.0

5.0

5.0 5.0

4.2

0.7

GND

USB_DN

USB_DP

+5V

DEF091

PCBDD0

GND

/FLG VIN

VOUT

HDMI/USB SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DVD MT PCB)

(HDMI_GND)

(CP6001)

ABC D E F GH

CP102_1

IMSA-9604S-04C

CP103

B2013H02-2P

CD102

2F041508

FFC

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

Q103

KRA103SRTK

CP101

TOC-C09X-A1

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

C131

1006.3V KA

C163

6.3V KA

C105

2216V KA

C112

2206.3V KA

C115

3310V KA

C123

4.7

50V KA

C104

2206.3V KA

L101

1626010

COIL,BIAS OSC

C125

390P CH C126

0.1 F

C122

0.0012 B

C120

C107

0.015 B

C132

C162

0.1 F

C140

15P CH

C169

0.047 F

C160

22P CH

C114

0.1 F

C118

0.01 B

C127

180P CH

C148

C146

C151

C137

C124

C133

C117

0.01 B

C116

0.1 F

C139

0.1 F

C165

0.047 F

C166

0.068 B

C154

0.1 B

C108

0.01 B

C143

C141

0.01 B

C156

0.1 F

C144

0.01 B

C121

0.0027 B

C147

0.022 B

C145

0.022 B

C101

0.033100V MMTS

C158

C106

0.01 B

C161

22P CH

C134

C129

1F C109

0.1 B

R119

1.8K

R122

100K

R144

220K 1/4W

R136

22K

R137

12K 1/4W

R142

820

R133

8.2K

R138

22K

R126

1.8K

R113

220

R102

10K

R103

10K

R140

2.2K 1/4W

R101

560

R110

8.2K

R111

8.2K

R112

330K

R109

1/4W

R114

20K

R116

15K

R127

680K

R106

680

R108

22K

R124

82K

R117

6.8K

R131

1.5K

R105

1K 1/4W

R129

1.8K

R115

820

R141

100

R107

3.9K

R132

3.3K

R123

2.2K 1/4W

R139

12K

C138

150V YK

C110

4716V YK

C119_1

1025V KA

C174

6.3V KA

C136

2250V YK

C135

0.22

50V YK

C152

476.3V KA

C142

476.3V KA

C102

1025V KA

Q101

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

AUDIO PB SW

Q102

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

AUDIO PB SW

Q104

KTC3203_Y

BIAS OSC

Q109

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

BUFFER

W819

W817

W852

W815

TP101

V.ENV

W801

Q105

KTA1266

BIAS CTL

Q107

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

BUFFER

X101

100DT3R528

3.579545MHZ

L107

22uH 0305

L104_1

22uH 0305

L102

100uH 0305

IC101

LA71206M-MPB-E

Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP IC 1 1011121314151617 18 192 20

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

414243444546474849

50515253545556575859

616263646566676869

70717273747576777879

L103

5.6uH

S802X S802Y

COMP

H.SW

Y/C_CS

ENV.DET

P.CON+5V

H.AMP_SW

C.ROTARY

Y/C_DATA

Y/C_CLK

AUDIO_MUTE-H

FSC

P.CON+5V

GND

DVD_V_OUT

TU/REAR_V_IN

Y/C_VIDEO_OUT

FSC FSC

TO_NORMAL_A

FROM_NORMAL_A

HF2 4FSC FRONT_V_IN

HF_COM

HF1

4FSC

Y/C_CLK

Y/C_DATA

Y/C_CS

DUMMY_V.SYNC

V.REC_ST-H

C.ROTARY

AUDIO_MUTE-H

CTL-

P.CON+5V

CTL+

H.AMP_SW

TU/REAR_V_IN

COMP

ENV.DET

H.SW

FRONT_V_IN

C.SYNC

DVD_V_OUT

Y/C_VIDEO_OUT

C.SYNC

P.CON+5V DUMMY_V.SYNC

P.CON+5V

TO_NORMAL_A

CTL+

CTL- P.CON+5V

V.REC_ST-H

FROM_NORMAL_A

GND

HOT

H-12H-11

FROM POWER

FROM/TO CYL

PCB010

DME063

(VCR MT PCB)

Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

CTL-

CTL+

AUDIO PB

AUDIO REC

2.3 2.3 2.3 2.32.3 2.3 0 2.3 2.3 4.80.8 1.1 1.1 1.4 02.0 0.22.62.6

5.3

5.2

FE HEAD(HOT)

4.8

FE HEAD(GND)

0.7

EP/LP-CH2 (L)

EP/LP-CH1 (R)

SP-CH2 (L)

SP-CH1 (R)

EP/LP COM

HF1 (R)

HF2 (L)

Vref

2.3V

SP,LP

AMP

ALC

A-VCC

A-GND

PRE GND

REC:LP<EP

PB:EP

DET

PB,EE

VREF

REC

AMP MUTE

AUTO

BIAS

LINE

AMP REC

FM-EQ

AGC

VHS SOPB

FM EQ PR

S-EQ

MAIN

DE-EM

LIM

DOUBBLE FM

DEM SUB

LPF

DET

EMPHA

FIL

MAIN

4.7K

Y-VCC

V.SYNC

SEP

6DB

QV/QH

AGC

TC2

BAL

TC1

REG

VDD 4Fsc CLOCK

PLL

TIMMING OUT

DRIVER AUTO-BIAS

CLAMP

CCD

VSS

OUT

VCA VCA

CLAMP

VCP

ALWAYS

VX01 320FH

VCO SLD

PHASE

fo-ADJ

PHASE

Q-ADJ

AGC

FIL Y-GND

FBC

1/2

VIDEO

AGC

Y/C

MIX

NC1

N.L.

DEEM

Y-LPF

CLAMP

DETAIL

ENH

EMPHA

MOD

NORMAL

R-EQ

TEST

YNR/COMB

3.58M

BPF1

B.D

AMP

CNC

BGA

AFTER

BEFORE

3.58M

BPF2

B-UP

AMP

Main

CONV

ACC

AMP

DET

ACC

C-LPF

4.21M

BPF

Sub

CONV R

LPF

REC

AFC

APC

REC

APC

C-VCC

SERAIL

DECODER

C-GND

C-ROT

RF-SW

AUDIO

MUTE

HA SW

ENV

DET

ACC

DET

HA VCC

COMP

OUT

KILL

DET

CHROMA

GND

PB-C

VSS

SYNC

2.1

2.9

1.6

1.8

1.9

1.8

5.0

1.8

1.6

1.8

2.3

4.9

2.3

2.3 2.1

3.2

4.4

5.0

4.1

3.6

1.6

2.1

2.3

4.1

2.6

3.3

2.6

3.2

2.5

1.6

0.82.21.24.94.93.24.95.25.25.205.204.84.8 2.1 4.1 3.3 3.2

2.8

SP_COM

HF_COM

TO FULL ERASE HEAD

4.9

3.3

3.9

FROM/TO SYSCON

FROM/TO TUNER/JACK

FROM OPERATION/DISPLAY

2.2

1.6

FROM/TO Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR

FROM/TO HEAD AUDIO CONTROL

ABC D E F GH

JG3002 JG3003 JG3004 JG3005 JG3007 JG3008JG3006

IC3003 PST3231NR

SYSTEM RESET IC

123

SW3001

LSA-1144EAU

TAB SW

CP3001

TMC-J12P-B2

Q3007

KRC103SRTK

RX DRIVE

D3002

1SS133

D3007

1SS133

D3009

1SS133

Q3006

ST-304L

EOT SENSOR

Q3008

ST-304L

BOT SENSOR

IC3001

OEC0157B

SYSCON/TIMER/SERVO IC

110 101102103104105106107108109112 111

110

100

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 192 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

50 51 52 53 54 55 56

575859

60616263646566676869

70717273747576777879

8081828384

8586878889

90919293949596979899

IC3099_1 BR24L02F-WE2

EEP ROM IC

1234

5678

Q3005

RPI-352C40N

MS_SEN A

Q3004

RPI-352C40N

MS_SEN B

D3001

LTE-3271T-012A-O

Q3002 RPI-303

REEL SENS

Q3001

RPI-303

REEL SENS

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

Q3003

KRA103SRTK

RX DRIVE

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

C3013

2216V KA

C3023

2206.3V YK

C3032

2.2

50V KA

C3052

2216V KA

C3029

476.3V KA

C3038

C3010

0.001 B

C3030

0.1 F

C3024

12P CH

C3066

0.01 B

C3002

C3020

0.022 B

C3014

180P CH

C3036 0.1 F

C3049

100P CH

C3004 0.022 B

C3001

C3022

470P B

C3053

0.1 F

C3061

0.1 F

C3040

C3034

C3017

0.001 B

C3008

0.0047 B

C3007

0.1 B

C3065

0.1 F

C3006

0.001 B

C3005

0.001 B

C3050 0.01 B

C3025

15P CH

C3009

0.1 F

C3027

0.1 F

C3031

0.0015 B

C3044

12P CH

C3018

150P CH

C3019

0.1 B

C3041

0.0015 B

C3035

0.001

C3000

0.001 B

C3015

820P B

R3046

10K

R3043

470K

R3030

5.6K

R3033

10K

R3037 47K

R3055 22K

R3063

R3010

10K

R3051

18K

R3017

560

R3002

120 1/4W

R3036

10K

R3057

22K

R3015

47K 1/4W

R3021 1K

R3009

2.2K

R3019

47K 1/4W

R3006

47K

R3083

33K

R3050

100 1/4W

R3087

33K

R3038 4.7K

R3026

270K

R3028

47K 1/4W

R3003

3.3K

R3035

10K

R3049

47K

R3053

470K

R3016

270 1/4W

R3004

330K

R3001

5.6K

R3011

47K 1/4W

R3045

3.3K

R3044 3.3K

R3047

10K

R3062 1K

R3034

R3032

10K

R3031

R3008

R3012

56K 1/4W

R3014 56K

R3007

6.8K

R3020

560

R3022

150K

R3027

15K

R3056

R3025

470

C3016

476.3V

C3033

22016V YK

C3045

0.4750V KA

C3021_1

1025V KA

W867

W906

TP3001

SERVICE

W835

W838

W839

W840

W837

W836

TP3002 H.SW

X3001

100GT01006

10MHz

L3003

12uH

AT+5.2V

H.SW

MD0

RESET

SEG_8

SEG_7

SEG_6

SEG_5

SCL

AT+5.2V

FWE

SEG_10

SEG_9

SDA

SEG_2

DUMMY_V.SYNC

SEG_3

REC_MUTE_H

SEG_4

AT+5V[M-CON]

C.SYNC

TX V.REC_ST-H

RX C.ROTARY

DVD_POWER_CTL AUDIO_MUTE-H

AT+12.6_V CTL-

P.CON+5V CTL+

AT+5V[M-CON] H.AMP_SW

VCR_POWER_ON-L RX COMP

CAP_LIMIT ENV.DET

POWER_FAIL

H.SW

AT+5.2V

Y/C_CS

GND

Y/C_DATA

MOTOR_GND Y/C_CLK

TV/VCR SEG_1

4FSC

POWER_MUTE-L Y/C_DATA

SYS_MUTE Y/C_CLK

DVD_POWER_CTL

RF_CH_SW

5G/CS/BS_LED

SW_V_OUT

4G/VSC_LED

AV_SW1

AV_SW2 3G/TV/VCR_LED AV_SW2

SCL

AV_SW1 2G/DUB/REC_LED

SDA

Y/C_CS 1G/VCR/T-REC_LED AFT-S.CURVE

CAP_FG

TV/VCR

AT+12.6_V RF_CH_SW VCR_LED

VIDEO_OUT

P.CON+5V AUDIO_MUTE-H DVD_LED

POWER_MUTE-L

CAP_F/R

V.REC_ST-H DVD_POWER_CTL VIDEO_MUTE-H

CAP_LIMIT

LDM_CTL DVD_RESET

SYS_MUTE

CAP_F/R REM_IN

AT+12.6_V

C.ROTARY REC_L/REEL-T

CONTROL_IN VCR_POWER_ON-L

LDM_CTL H.AMP_SW

REC_MUTE_H

CYL_FG/PG COMP VIDEO_MUTE-H

HIFI_ENV.DET

CYL_DRIVE AT+5.2V

CONTROL_IN HIFI_H.SW

C.SYNC AUDIO_MUTE-H

CYL_DRIVE VSC_L/REEL-S SCL

SDA

CYL_FG/PG POWER_FAIL

ST_SELECT

H.SW AT+5V[M-CON]

HIFI_H.SW TAB_SW

DVD_LED

AT+5.2V VCR_LED

AFT-S.CURVE KEY-A

KEY-B

DUMMY_V.SYNC HIFI_ENV.DET

REM_IN

ST_SELECT

1G/VCR/T-REC_LED

C.SYNC KEY-A 2G/DUB/REC_LED

EOT

3G/TV/VCR_LED

AT+5V[M-CON] KEY-B

BOT 4G/VSC_LED

5G/CS/BS_LED

SEG_1

SEG_2

CTL+

SEG_3

SEG_4

AT+5.2V SEG_5

CTL- SEG_6

SEG_7

AT+5.2V SEG_8

SEG_9

SEG_10

AT+5V[M-CON]

VIDEO_OUT

MS_SEN-B

MS_SEN-A

SW_V_OUT

TAB_SW

SW_V_OUT

CAP_FG

ENV.DET

4FSC

BOT

EOT

SDA

SCL

AT+5.2V

MS_SEN-B

MS_SEN-A

RESET

REC_L/REEL-T

VSC_L/REEL-S

AT+5V[M-CON]

P.CON+5V

AT+5.2V

MD0

RESET

FWE

AT+5V[M-CON]

2.4 1.2

H-14

H-13

FROM/TO Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD.AMP

PCB010

DME063

CV IN2

CV IN1

REC_L/

REEL T

JUST_CLK

ST SELECT

REC MUTE-H

NCNC

000

NC SERVICE

3.4

5.3

5.2

SYNC DET/

VSC_L/ REEL S

(VCR MT PCB)

1.2

5.10.9

1.3

5.1

0.4

0.9

5.1

5.0

4.8

5.2 0 5.0 4.9

(LED_GND)

FROM/TO DECK

MOTOR GND

CYL CTL

CYL FG/PG

LDM CTL

CAP CTL

LD/CY VCO

I LIMIT

CAP.M/F/R

CAP VCO

CAP FG

GND

VCC

3.3

SYSCON SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

POWER ON-L

VIDEO_MUTE-H

5.0

0.1

RF CH SW

SYS MUTE

/RESET

DVD_POWER_CTL

DVD RESET

DVD LED

5.0

4.8

4.7

3.3

5.1

0.3

5.0

4.84.804.800

5.0

4.84.82.53.45.1

0.1

5.1

2.4

2.5

1G/VCR/T-REC_LED

NCNC

OUT IN GND

VCR LED

2G/DUB/REC LED

4G/TIME SHIFT LED

5G/CS/BS LED

3G/TV/VCR LED

SEG1

SEG2

SEG3

SEG4

VSS

SDA

SCL

TEST

VCC

IIC CLK

IIC SDA

SEG9

SEG10

LDM_CTL

V.REC ST-H

AUDIO MUTE-H

Y/C CS

AV SW1

AV SW2

TAB SW

Y/C DATA

Y/C CLK

CAP FWD-L

SEG6

SEG7

SEG8

SEG5

POWER MUTE-L

VCR_H

CYL SPEED UP

CAP LIMIT

VCC (BACK UP)

D FG/PG

SI1/RX

SO1/TX

REM IN

C SYNC/H SYNC

POWER FAIL

VSS (GND)

KEY-A

4FSCOUT/2FSCOUT

4FSCIN/2FSCIN

KEY-B

BOT-H

V ENV

AVCC (BACK UP)

VSS (GND)

FWE

OSC1

OSC2

VCL

MD0

VSS (GND)

H.AMP SW

COMP

VIDEO H.SW

HIFI H.SW

DRUM PWM

CAP PWM

DUMMY_V.SYNC

C SYNC

VCC (BACK UP)

V CYNC

AFC LPF

AFC OSC

AFC PC

CTL REF

CTL(+)

CTL(-)

CTL BIAS

CTL FB

CTL AMP(O)

CTL SMT(I)

CAP FG

SVCC (P.CON5V)

SVSS (GND)

112

111

AVSS (GND)

MS SEN-A

MS SEN-B

EOT-H

ST SELECT

HiFi ENV

AFT S.CURVE

C.ROTARY

CAP FULL

OVCC

CV OUT

OVSS(GND)

0 0 2.5 0 2.5 0.1 2.6 2.5 2.3 5.1 2.0 2.0 1.5 0.4 0 3.1 2.6 5.1 2.6 0 0 2.5 0 2.6 0 0 1.3 1.3

5.2

3.7

2.5

5.1

5.0

5.1

05.04.901.51.45.100

2.7

3.0

2.5

2.7

0.4

5.1

5.0

5.1

2.4

FROM/TO TUNER/JACK

FROM/TO POWER

FROM/TO Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR

FROM/TO OPERATION1/DISPLAY

5.2 0 5.2 0

5.05.0

ABC D E F GH

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

OS8001

RFT5CB1

OPTICAL

J8008

DIN-409A

Y/C SEPA

H1 H1H2

J8007

MSP-213V1-652_NI_LF

YUV OUT

H1H1 H2

J8001

MSP-213V1-432_NI_LF

REAR OUT JACK 1

H1H1 H2

J8006

MSP-213V1-732_NI_LF

DVD AUDIO OUT

COAXIAL

TU301 115-V-HA35ARE_G

IC8005 MM1501XNRE

AV SW IC

123

456

IC8002 MM1501XNRE

AV SW IC

123

456

H1 NC H1 H2

J8002

MSP-213V2-432_NI_LF

REAR IN JACK

234

B8001

BLM18BD102SN1

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION :SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTION

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

ARE

D8001

MTZJ10B-EIC

C8040_1

4.716V KANP

CP8001_1

IMSA-9604S-16C

Q8022

KRC103SRTK

Q8011

KRC103SRTK

MUTE SW

Q8002

KRC104SRTK

MUTE SW

Q8003

KRC103SRTK

VIDEO MUTE SW

D8005

1SS133

D8004

1SS133

D8006

1SS133

IC8001 RC4580IDR

AUDIO_AMP IC

1234

5678

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

CD8001

2F0G1002

FFC

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

Q8010

KRA101SRTK

MUTE SW

Q8007

KRA103SRTK

MUTE SW

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

C8034

2206.3V YK

C309

2206.3V YK

C8003_1

1025V KA

C8005

4706.3V YK

C8013

1050V KA

C307

33P CH C308

0.01 B

C8054

33P CH

C8060

10P CH

C8046

0.1 F

C8025

0.1 B

C8023

0.022 B

C8033

220P CH

C8065

330P CH

C8050

150P CH

C8009

0.0015 B

C8008

0.0015 B

C303

0.1 F

C317

100P CH

C302

100P CH

C8055

33P CH

C8028

100P CH

C8059

0.1 F

C8014

0.1 F

C8021

0.1 F

C8057

0.1 F

C8058

10P CH

C8044

330P

C8049

330P CH

C8056

0.1 F

C8064

330P

C8045

150P CH

R8047

33 1/4W

R8033

560 1/4W

R8040

R8012

470

R8008

470

R306

R8037

R8029

560 1/4W

R8036

75 1/4W

R8028

560 1/4W

R8054

2.2K

R8021

R8004

22K 1/4W

R8026

470K

R8025

R8053

56 1/4W

R8049

10K

R8046

100K

R8045

100K

R8051

47K

R8050

10K

R8042

10K

R302

R304

R301

33K

R8010

R8059

4.7K 1/4W

R8035

15K

R8034

1.5K

R8039

12K

R8023

3.3K

R8027

4.7K

R8024

4.7K

R8022

R8015

270

R8014

270

R8017

2.2K

R8016

2.2K

R8011

100 1/4W

R8009

330 1/2W

R8003

1.5K

R8002

3.3K

R8005

220

R8006

R8007

100K

R8013

10K

R8048

10K

R8031

470

R8057

47K

R8041

10K

R8038

12K

R8055

1.5K

R8052

15K

R8001

R8030

470

C8047_1

470

6.3V YK

C8015_1

470

6.3V YK

C8031

4.750V KA

C8048

1000

6.3V

C8043

4716V

C8024

476.3V KA

C8051

3350V YK

C8062_1

470

16V YK

C318_1

25V KA

C315_1

1025V KA

C8010_1

25V KA

C8075_1

4716V YK

C8004_1

10016V

C313_1

25V KA

C8063_1

470

16V YK

C8032

4.750V KA

C8022

476.3V KA

C8036

2.250V KA

C8035

2.250V KA

C8038

2216V KA

C8042

2216V KA

C8037

2216V KA

Q8008

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

AUDIO MUTE

Q8012

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

MUTE DET Q8009

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

AUDIO MUTE

Q8005

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

MUTE SW

Q8001

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

D AUDIO DRIVER

Q8006

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

MUTE SW

W879

W880

W881

W820

W808

W800

W847

Q8021

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

BUFFER

Q8004

KTA1266

BUFFER

Q8019

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

BUFFER

Q8020

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

BUFFER

L8007

100uH 0305

L301

22uH 0305

L8009

100uH 0305

L8008

100uH 0305

L8002

0.33uH

L8004

47uH

L8001

0.33uH

S801Y

S801X

DVD_C

AV_SW1

P.CON+9V

DVD_U

DVD_V

SW_V_OUT

DVD_V_OUT

P.CON+10V

DVD_Y

Y/C_VIDEO_OUT

DVD_Y

DVD_POWER_CTL

DVD_RESET

ZERO

DVD_V

DVD_U

DVD_C

SPDIF

SYS_MUTE

ZERO

AT+5.2V

P.CON+5V

DVD_V_OUT

DVD_A_OUT_R

DVD_A_OUT_L

FSC

TU/REAR_V_IN

Y/C_VIDEO_OUT

DVD_POWER_CTL

DVD_RESET

SYS_MUTE

SCL

SDA

RF_CONV_A_OUT

AV_SW1

AV_SW2

TV/VCR

RF_CH_SW

P.CON+5V AFT-S.CURVE

POWER_MUTE-L

TV/VCR

VIDEO_MUTE-H

VIDEO_OUT

SW_V_OUT

P.CON+9V

DVD_A_OUT_R

AV_SW2

AT+5.2V

P.CON+10V

VIDEO_OUT

DVD_A_OUT_L

P.CON+10V

FSC

AUDIO_OUT_L

REAR_A_IN_L

REAR_A_IN_R

POWER_MUTE-L

AUDIO_OUT_R

VIDEO_MUTE-H

TU/REAR_V_IN

SIF_OUT

P.CON+9V

REAR_A_IN_L

SCL REAR_A_IN_R

AUDIO_OUT_L

SDA

AUDIO_OUT_R

RF_CONV_A_OUT

AFT-S.CURVE

SIF_OUT GND

+32V

AT+5.2V

P.CON+5V

P.CON+10V

SPDIF

P.CON+6V

P.CON+9V

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

5.1

H-16H-15

FROM POWER

CVBS

GND

U(B)

GND

V(R)

GND

AUDIO-L

GND

AUDIO-R

ZERO

DVD RESET

DVD-H

Y(G)

DVD CVBS

GND

(CP8101_1)

P-H/I-L

YUV

PCB010

DME063

5.1

0.3

VRLV3.3

2.6

5.1

2.3

2.2

INPUT

VCC

GND

TU 32V

SIF OUT

A.OUT

FSC

NCNC

V.IN

CONTROL

A.IN

DATA

CLOCK

AFT

V.OUT

7.0

8.4

SW1

V OUT

VccVin2

GND

Vin1

11.7

07.8

(VCR MT PCB)

TUNER/JACK SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

A_GND

5.85.85.80

5.8 5.8 5.8 11.6

VCC

5.2

FROM/TO Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP

FROM/TO SYSCON

Vcc

BAIAS

BUFFER

FROM/TO Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR

0.2

5.0

3.8

5.0

2.0

0.2

31.0

2.0

5.2

4.2

9.0

3.5

5.1

6.8

3.2

0.6

0.3

0.6

0.3

5.3

ABC D E F GH

CP651_1

IMSA-9604S-07F

J653

RCA-109-01

FRONT AV JACK

VIDEO

J652

RCA-109-01

FRONT AV JACK

AUDIO L

2HNC

J651

MSP-281V30-A

FRONT AV JACK

AUDIO R

Vout

B+

GND

OS651

ROM-V338LO

SW655

EVQ21505R

CH DOWN

SW654

EVQ21505R

CH UP

SW653

EVQ21505R

VCR/DVD(REC)

V651 TOF-440EBHG-B16/B4

1101112131415 23456789

Q652

KRC103SRTK

SEG10 SW

Q653

KRC103SRTK

SEG9 SW

Q655

KRC103SRTK

SEG8 SW

Q656

KRC103SRTK

SEG7 SW

Q664

KRC103SRTK

SEG1 SW

Q663

KRC103SRTK

SEG2 SW

Q662

KRC103SRTK

SEG3 SW

Q660

KRC103SRTK

SEG4 SW

Q658

KRC103SRTK

SEG5 SW

Q657

KRC103SRTK

SEG6 SW

D656

1N4005-EIC

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

CP653

52147-0210

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

Q666

KRA103SRTK

DVD LED SW

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

C652

100

10V YK

C656

1025V KA

C600

0.1 F

C654

470P B

C655

470P B

R662

180

R672

180

R673

180

R663

180

R666

180

R670

180

R667

180

R651

100 1/4W

R661

820

R665

180

R664

820

R674

180

R675

820

R671

820

R668

180

R669

820

R676

R683

220

R677

2.7K

R678

3.3K

C653

47010V YK

W807

Q651

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

5G SW

Q654

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

4G SW

Q665

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

1G SW

Q661

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

2G SW

Q659

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

3G SW

DVD_LED

VCR_LED

1G/VCR/T-REC_LED

KEY-B

2G/DUB/REC_LED

3G/TV/VCR_LED

4G/VSC_LED

5G/CS/BS_LED

SEG_1

SEG_2

SEG_3

SEG_4

SEG_5

SEG_6

SEG_7

SEG_8

SEG_9

SEG_10

REM_IN

KEY-B

KEY-A

FRONT_A_IN_R

REM_IN

AT+5.2V

FRONT_A_IN_L

FRONT_A_IN_R

FRONT_V_IN

1G/VCR/T-REC_LED

2G/DUB/REC_LED

3G/TV/VCR_LED

5G/CS/BS_LED

FRONT_V_IN

4G/VSC_LED

SEG_5

SEG_7

SEG_9

SEG_10

SEG_3

SEG_4

SEG_8

SEG_1

SEG_2

SEG_6

LEM_VCC

P.CON+5V

AT+5.2V

GND

KEY-A

KEY-B

AT+5.2V

DVD_LED

VCR_LED

AT+5.2V

KEY-A

KEY-B

H-18H-17

TO Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR

TO OPERATION/LED

(VCR MT PCB)

OPERATION/DISPLAY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

KEY-B

KEY-A

AT+5.2V

VCR LED

DVD LED

GND

(CP682)

FROM/TO OPERATION/LED

PCB010

DME063

5.25.2

5.1

0.4 0

4.0

0.9 0

4.0

1.3 5.2

4.9

03.5

5.2

3.1 0

4.9

1.7

1.1

1.75.2

4.9

2.0

1.9

4.0

0.40

4.0

1.75.2

4.9

3.0

1.00

4.9

5.2 1.7

0 0.4

4.0

4.9

FROM/TO SYSCON

KEY-B

GND

TO Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP

FROM POWER

(CP683)

ABC D E F GH

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

C731

6.3V

C735

10016V KA

C758 4.750V KA

C751

2216V KA

C709

C724

0.1 F

C732

0.01 B

C705

C715

C714

0.033 B

C718

0.1 B

C717

C711

560P CH

C723

C707

C747

C746

0.1 F

C757

0.0047 B

C754

0.01 B

C764

0.1 F

C766

0.1 F

C704

0.01 B

C771

0.01 B

C752

0.1 F

C703

C702

C741 560P CH

C708

0.022 B

C733

C730

0.1 F

C701

C710

560P CH

C706 680P CH

C739

0.1 F

C768

0.0047 B

C762

0.01 B

C749

680P CH

C743

0.01 B

C748

C760 0.01 B

C744 560P CH

R712

47K 1/4W

R702

47K 1/4W

R718

2.2M 1/4W

R710

390K 1/4W

R7014.7K

R715

5.6K

R722

1.8K

R723

12K 1/4W

R714 5.6K

R706

47K 1/4W

R708

330

R704

1K 1/4W

R713

1.5K

R711

5.6K

R707

1.8K

R726

2.2K

R727

470

R717

330

R716

330

R703

12K 1/4W

R731

R721

1.5K

R719

47K 1/4W

R724

1K 1/4W

R729 100 1/4W

R728 100 1/4W

R725 39K

R720 5.6K

C742

2.250V KA

C722

10016V YK

C750_1

1025V KA

C740_1

25V KA

C721_1

25V KA

C720_1

25V KA

C725

2216V KA

C712

4.750V KA

C728

16V KA

C716

4.750V KA

C719

4.750V KA

C713

4.750V KA

C726

4.750V KA

C727

2.250V KA

C753

4.750V KA

C759

2216V KA

C765

476.3V KA

C756

476.3V KA

C767

4.7

50V KA

C763

2216V KA

C755_1

1025V KA

TP701

HIFI ENV

W850

W821

L704

22uH 0305

L705

22uH 0305

IC701

LA72670BM-L-MPB-E

HI-FI/DEMODULATOR IC 1 101112131415161718192 20

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

414243444546474849

50515253545556575859

616263646566676869

70717273747576777879

L701

22uH

L702

22uH

L703

22uH

FSC

SIF_OUT

AUDIO_MUTE-H

P.CON+9V

FRONT_A_IN_L

FRONT_A_IN_R

REAR_A_IN_L

REAR_A_IN_R

SIF_OUT

DVD_A_OUT_L

DVD_A_OUT_R

RF_CONV_A_OUT

AUDIO_OUT_L

ST_SELECT

AUDIO_OUT_R

HIFI_H.SW

SCL

SDA

REAR_A_IN_R P.CON+5V

FRONT_A_IN_R

FSC

FROM_NORMAL_A

DVD_A_OUT_R

TO_NORMAL_A

HF2

HF_COM

HF1

AUDIO_OUT_R HIFI_ENV.DET

AT+5.2V

P.CON+5V

P.CON+9V

AUDIO_OUT_L GND

REC_MUTE_H

HIFI_ENV.DET

HIFI_H.SW

FROM_NORMAL_A

AUDIO_MUTE-H

SCL

SDA

ST_SELECT

RF_CONV_A_OUT

P.CON+5V

FRONT_A_IN_L

TO_NORMAL_A

REAR_A_IN_L

DVD_A_OUT_L

AT+5.2V

P.CON+9V

H-20

H-19

FROM OPERATION/DISPLAY

PCB010

DME063

2.72.72.72.70.34.82.52.7000.40.10.48.93.83.81.50.300.3

PILOT

DET

CONT SAP

DET

ST/SAP

DEMOD

SAP

DEMOD

L-R

PLL

STEREO

CANCEL

PILOT

FILUTER

SAPFILUTER

Adj.

FILUTER

STEREO

D.C

VREF

MATRIX

DEC

dbx

LIM

AMP

SIF

DEMOD

RIPPLE

FILTER

MUTE ALC OUT

SEL

A GND

L-CH

IN SEL

R-CH

PNR

LIM

DEV

HOLD

PULSE

LOGIC

NOISE

DO DET

COMP R-CH

BPF

R-CH

BPF

LIM

NOISE

DET

VCO

LPF

MIX

ENV

DET

VREF

COMP

PB AMP

REC AMP

REC-H

0.3

0.4

0.7

0.1

2.5

0.1

4.1

0.1

0.1 2.5 8.9 2.5 5.1 0.1 0 0.7 0 0 0 2.5 2.7 2.5 4.8 2.5 5.0 0.2 2.7 2.7

2.7

2.6

0.1

2.3

0.1

3.0

3.5

4.9

2.5

4.6

4.7

2.5

0.2

FROM/TO Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP

(VCR MT PCB)

4.8

0.2

Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

FROM/TO TUNER/JACK

FROM/TO SYSCON

FROM POWER

ABC D E F GH

L506

10uH TSL0808

IC501 KIA431A-AT

VOLTAGE CTL IC

123

REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE FUSE

:FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,

CAUTION

N’UTILISER QUE DES FUSIBLE DE MEME TYPE

:POUR UNE PROTECTION CONTINUE LES RISQUES D’INCEIE

ATTENTION

HS501

763WAAA070

HS6S

HS502

763WAAA120

HS6S

2.5A 125V

T501

81291244

IC502 KIA78R06API

6V REG. IC

1234

Q501

2SK3563(ORION_Q)

SWITCHING

L502

W5T_20X10X10A

BLACK

WHITE

BLADE

WIDE

CD501

09415911

AC120V_60HZ

IC503

PS2561AL1-1-V(W)

PHOTO COUPLER

FH501

EYF-52BCY

FH502

EYF-52BCY

L501

SS11VL-05230

COIL,LINE FILTER

F501

2.5A125V

51MS025L

R516

0.22 1W

R502

0.68 1W

R512

68K 1W

R535

3.9 3W

D524

1SS133

D514

MTZJ11B-EIC

D516

MTZJ5.1B-EIC

D523

MTZJ33B-EIC

CP501_1

A2001WV2-13P

B501

W4BRH3.5X6X1.0X2

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION :SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTION

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

ARE

D510

MTZJ22B-EIC

D519

MTZJ6.8B-EIC

D526

MTZJ3.3B-EIC

S502

S501

Q506

KRC103SRTK

M-CON POWER SW

Q509

KRC103SRTK

P.ON SW

D512

1SS133

D527

1N4005-EIC

D515_1

SR340-004

D533

1N4005-EIC

D529

1N4005-EIC

D501

1SS133

D505

1N4005-EIC

D503

1N4005-EIC

D506

1N4005-EIC

D502

1N4005-EIC

D504

1SS133

D518

1SS133

D509

SARS01-V1

D511

SR340-004

D507

FR155-F

D508

1SS133

D522

1H3-E

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

C511_1

47200V PK

C540_1

47200V PK

C501

220016V YK

C514

10016V YK

C518

22006.3V FM

C521

10016V YK

C522

50V YK C519

10016V YK

C504

2200

10V YK

C524

0.47 B

C510

0.022 B

C508

0.022 B

C531

560P

500V B

C544

C527

0.001 B

C526

0.0022

250V KY

C515

0.01500V B

C516

0.0022250V KY

C502_1

0.22

275V ECQUL

C525

680P2KV R

C509

0.018 M

C513

100P2KV R

C520

C534

R552

100

R519

R507

10K

R547

100K

R530

470K 1/4W

R532

10K

R534

10K 1/2W

R501

3.3M 1/2W +-10%

R503

1.5M 1/2W

R531

10K

R504

560 1/2W

R529

680K 1/4W

R505

680K 1/4W

R506

1M1/2W

R508

100 1/4W

R549

100K 1/4W

R524

100

R522

3.3K +-1%

R520

3.3K +-1%

R521

470

R533

220 1/4W

R527

220 1/4W

R518

150

R517

1K 1/2W

R515

27K

R536

5.6K

R509

100 1/4W

R514

220 1/2W

R513

390 1/2W

R553

47K 1/4W

R554

10K 1/4W

R523

6.8K

R511

560K

C535

1025V KA

C512

1025V KA

C505

10016V YK

C506

100

10V YK

Q502

KTC3203_Y

PROTECT CONTROL

Q507

KTC3203_Y

PROTECT CONTROL

Q503

KTC3209_Y

P.CON+5V SW

Q505

2SD1835S/T-AA

P.CON5V SW

Q513

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

POWER FAIL SW

Q514

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

POWER FAIL SW

Q510

2SD1835S/T-AA

P.CON+12V SW

W829

W826

W856

W885

W834

W877

W827

W846

W841

W842

W822

W806

W845

W816

W833

W832

W886

W804

Q504

KTA1271_Y

M-CON +5V SW

L505

22uH 0305

AT+12.6_V

P.CON+5V

GND

P.CON+10V

P.CON+9V

AT+5.2V

DVD_POWER_CTL

VCR_POWER_ON-L

POWER_FAIL

AT+5V[M-CON]

VCR_POWER_ON-L AT+12.6_V

P.CON+5V

GND

MOTOR_GND

P.CON+5V_DH

P.CON+9V

SPDIF

+32V

AT+5.2V

P.CON+5V

DVD_POWER_CTL

P.CON+10V

P.CON+6V GND

LEM_VCC

P.CON+5V

AT+5.2V

AT+3.8V

GND

P.CON+5V

LEM_VCC P.CON+9V

P.CON+5V

AT+5.2V AT+5.2V

GND

AT+5V[M-CON]

+32V

AT+5.2V

P.CON+6V

P.CON+5V_DH

POWER_FAIL AT+3.8V

SPDIF

10.4

(VCR MT PCB)

POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

0.5

H-22

H-21

TO Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR

TO OPERATION/DISPLAY

TO TUNER/JACK

TO Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

(CD4002)

3.2

PCB010

DME063

16.0

142.0 96

16.6

12.9

2.5A 125V(F501).

BLACK

WHITE

12.5

0.3 4.1

5.1

139.3

0.1

0.5

0.3

0.6

4.1

INOUT GND

2.50

4.4

5.2 5.1

12.4

0.1

3.3

5.3

IN SWOUT GND

FROM/TO SYSCON

05.3

GND(D)

GND(M)

P.CON+A5V

UNREG+3.8V

GND(A)

SPDIF

19.1

P.CON+6V

0 5.09.011.6

AT+5.2V

11.1

ABC D E F GH

D685

LTL-1CHGE-002A

VCR LED

D686

LTL-1CHGE-002A

DVD LED

CP682

IMSA-9604S-07F

SW699

EVQ11L05R

POWER

SW697

EVQ11L05R

VCR EJECT

SW689

EVQ11L05R

STOP

SW691

EVQ11L05R

VCR/DVD

SW687

EVQ11L05R

FF/CUE

SW690

EVQ11L05R

OPEN/CLOSE

SW686

EVQ11L05R

PLAY

SW685

EVQ11L05R

REW/REV

CP683

B2013H02-2P

CD682

2H070904

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

R693

220 1/4W

R700

3.3K 1/4W

R691

15K 1/4W

R695

33K 1/4W

R692

1.5K 1/4W

R686

6.8K 1/4W

R699

13K 1/4W

R689

3.3K 1/4W

R697

12K 1/4W

R698

2.7K 1/4W

H-24H-23

PCB270

DEE080

FROM OPERATION/DISPLAY

(CP653)

OPERATION/LED SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

KEY-B

KEY-A

DVD LED

VCR LED

AT+5.2V

FROM/TO OPERATION/DISPLAY

GND

(OPERATION PCB)

(CP651_1)

GND

KEY-B

(OPERATION2 PCB)

PCB280

DEE081

ABC D E F GH

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

(LOADING MOTOR PCB)

LOADING MOTOR/SW SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

H-26

H-25

(SW PCB)

SSS-13-2

SW1

GND(SW)

SW-2(CLOSE)

SW-1(OPEN)

LOADING MOTOR(-)

LOADING MOTOR(+)

DED003

PCB610

DED002

PCB640

BCZ3B52

M2603

CD2302

2H052601

1 GND(SW)

FEED MOTOR (+)

SPINDLE MOTOR (+)

SPINDLE MOTOR (-)

FEED MOTOR (-)

PICK UP INNER LIMIT SWITCH

SW2

JCV9B06

M2601

BCZ3B03

M2602

ESE22MH24

CD2301

2H062102

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTIONDESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES ARE

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

ABC D E F GH

CP5901_3

HDMI CONNECTOR

CD4002_1

CP501_1

CP103

CP653

CP683

CP2301

CP2302

CP101

CP2303

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

THE TIMETHIS INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST ATNOTE:

BLACK

WHITE

BLADE

WIDE

CD501

AC120V_60Hz

J652

FRONT AV JACK

AUDIO IN L

J653

FRONT AV JACK

VIDEO

HNC

J651

FRONT AV JACK

AUDIO IN R

Vout

B+

GND

OS651

J8008

Y/C SEPA

H1H1 H2

J8001

REAR OUT JACK

2 3

H1H1 H2

J8007

YUV OUT

2 3

5H1 H1H2

J8006

DVD AUDIO OUT

TU301

H1 NC H1 H2

J8002

REAR IN JACK

23 4

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION :SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTION

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

ARE

H-28H-27

POWER

HOTPLUG

D2+

D0-

CLK+

SDA

GND

D2-S

D2-

D1+

D1-S

D1-

D0+

D0-S

CLK-S

CLK-

CEC

SCL

CP6603

CP6601CP6602

CVBS

Y(G)

U(B)

GND

V(R)

GND

AUDIO-L

GND

AUDIO-R

ZERO

GND

DVD-H

DVD CVBS

DVD RESET

GND

P-H/I-L

GND(M)

P.CON+A5V

GND(A)

GND(D)

SPDIF

SSCCLK/TX

RDY(I/O(0))/RX

P.CON+6V

AT+5.2V

UNREG+3.8V

GND(D)

GND(M)

P.CON+A5V

UNREG+3.8V

GND(A)

SPDIF

P.CON+6V

AT+5.2V

CVBS

GND

U(B)

GND

V(R)

GND

AUDIO-L

GND

AUDIO-R

ZERO

DVD RESET

DVD-H

Y(G)

DVD CVBS

GND

P-H/I-L

DMF071

DEF091

USB PCB

USB CONNECTOR

+5V

GND

USB_DN

USB_DP

PCBDD0

GND

USB_DN

USB_DP

+5V

GND

USB_DN

USB_DP

+5V

CP8101_1

MON(DVD)

NC(SW)

VOL(DVD)

GND(DVD)

LD(DVD)

LD(CD)

VOL(CD)

GND(CD)

MON(COM)

VCC

Vref

GND(PDIC)

F-

F+

T-

T+

DVD/CD

MON(DVD)

NC(SW)

VOL(DVD)

GND(DVD)

LD(DVD)

LD(CD)

VOL(CD)

GND(CD)

MON(COM)

VCC

Vref

GND(PDIC)

F-

F+

T-

T+

DVD/CD

LD-

LD+

LD-

LD+

GND(D)

OPEN

GND(D)

OPEN

LIMIT SW LIMIT SW

SW(GND)SW(GND)

SLD-

SLD+

SP1-

SP1+

SLD-

SLD+

SP1-

SP1+

FFC

PCB130

DVD MT PCB

SLED MOTOR

LOADING MOTOR

FG SENSER

DM-3S

SPINDLE MOTOR

DRIVE

DVD

OPTICAL PICK-UP

AUDIO PB

CTL-

AUDIO REC

CD102

FFC

CTL+

H5001

HEAD AUDIO CONTROL ASS’Y

AUDIO

CONTROL

FPC

LD/CY VCO

FFC

CYLINDER UNIT

WHITERED

M101

LOADING MOTOR

D-U OUT

D-V OUT

D-W OUT

D-COM

M-GND

D-PG OUT

D-PG GND

EP/LP HEAD

SP HEAD

HI-FI HEAD

CAPSTAN DD UNIT

M2001

CYL CTL

CAP FG

CAP VCO

VCC

CAP CTL

CYL FG/PG

LDM CTL

GND

MOTOR GND

I LIMIT

CAP.M/F/R

VCC

FG SENSORMAGNETCOIL

LOGIC

SWITCH

OUT

SENSOR

HALL

VCC

HALL

MRROTORMAINHALL

FULL ERASE HEAD ASS’Y

AUDIO PB

AUDIO REC

CP102_1

CTL-

CTL+

CP3001

HF1 (R)

EP/LP COM

SP COM

HF2 (L)

HF COM

SP-CH2 (L)

SP-CH1 (R)

EP/LP-CH2 (L)

EP/LP-CH1 (R)

DME063

A.OUT

SIF OUT

TU 32V

PCB010

VCR MT PCB

FSC

V.OUT

V.IN

CONTROL

A.IN

AFT

DATA

FE HEAD (GND)

FE HEAD (HOT)

FE HEAD (GND)

FE HEAD (HOT)

H5002

OPERATION PCBOPERATION2 PCB

KEY-B

GND

CD683

FFC

GND

KEY-B

CD682

PCB280

DEE081

FFC

CP682

KEY-B

KEY-A

DVD LED

VCR LED

AT+5.2V

GND

KEY-B

KEY-A

AT+5.2V

VCR LED

DVD LED

GND

CP651_1

PCB270

DEE080

CP8001_1

CD8001

TM601

COMMAND TRANSMITTER

S501

S502

BLACK

WHITE

FFC

CLOCK

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

WAVEFORMS

I-1

The following waveforms were measured at the point of the corresponding

balloon number in the schematic diagram.

NOTE:

Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP

50µs

1.0V

MPEG/MICON/DSP/FR_AMP

10ns

1.0V

10µs

200mV

10µs

200mV

10µs

500mV

500µs

1.0V

5ns

200mV

200ns

20mV

AUDIO/VIDEO

10µs

200mV

10µs

500mV

10µs

500mV

100ns

100mV

1ms

100mV

REC

5µs

20V

200ms

500mV

WAVEFORMS

I-2

The following waveforms were measured at the point of the corresponding

balloon number in the schematic diagram.

NOTE:

5µs

500mV

POWER

5µs

5.0V

200µs

1.0V

POWER ON

50ns

1.0V

500µs

1.0V

5ms

2.0V

10µs

200mV

TUNER/JACK

500µs

100mV

1ms

2.0V

10ms

1.0V

Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR

500µs

200mV

500µs

200mV

5ms

500mV

500µs

200mV

SYSCON

5ms

1.0V

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW

J1-1

211

117

120

204

113

118

202

212

202

107

202

115

119

206

119

210

108

204

122

127

121

214

124

125

213

PCBDD0

(USB PCB ASS'Y)

114

205

209

208

209

208

PCB130

(DVD MT PCB ASS'Y)

110

207

110

207

123

126

111

104

102

103 109

105 104

202

203

106

116

203

112

202

PCB010

(VCR MT PCB ASS'Y)

PCB270

(OPERATION PCB ASS'Y)

101P 101

101J

101M

101B

101N

101H

101I

101L

101G

101K

101A

101D 101O

101F

101C

101P

101E

PCB280

(OPERATION 2 PCB ASS'Y)

207

101Q 201

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW

(PACKING DIAGRAM)

J1-2

CD6002, CD6003,

TM601

130

131

128

129

133, 134, 135, 136

132

CHASSIS EXPLODED VIEW (TOP VIEW)

J2-1

505

503

UN4001

M2003 CD1501

321

309

325

312

315

504

H5001

503

306

305

332

507

335 342

322508

324

319

506

501

H5002

323

508

341

331

334 333

314

301

313

307

300

316

336

302 345

317

M101

304

CD1502

510

318

Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section.

Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.

NOTE:

CLASS

GREASE

MARK

M2001

300

303

502

329

311

310

330

505

502

338

502

337

340

509

308

344

327

343

326

328

AA AA

CD1501

CD1502

339

320

501

Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section.

Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.

NOTE:

CLASS

GREASE

MARK

CHASSIS EXPLODED VIEW (BOTTOM VIEW)

J2-2

DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW

J3-1

Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section.

Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.

NOTE:

CLASS

GREASE

MARK

600

610

608

M2603

704

612

614

615

613

602

609

611

AA AA

Do not replace the parts. Because,

minute adjustments are needed if

this condition is disassembled

further more.

If the repair is needed, replace the

DVD MECHA ASS'Y.

SW2

PCB640

(SW PCB ASS'Y) CD2001

CD2301

M2602

603

601

605

606

702

705

703

SW1

PCB610

(LOADING MOTOR PCB ASS'Y)

CD2302

701

607

604

705

617

616

618

619

Cannot supply separately.

If the repair is needed, replace the

LOADER SUB ASS'Y.

MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

101 AE008288 7A7010188A FRONT CABI ASS'Y

101A AE008289 701WPJ1409 CABINET FRONT

101B AE008166 711WPDA693 PLATE DISPLAY

101C AE008167 712WPJC212 FLAP DVD

101D AE008168 712WPJC213 FLAP VCR

101E AE008171 723000D250 SHEET LED

101F AE001847 7235490018 BADGE BRAND

101G AE008290 736WPB0020 BUTTON FRAME 1

101H AE008291 736WPB0021 BUTTON FRAME 2

101I AE008172 736WPAA010 BUTTON FRAME 3

101J AE008292 736WPB0023 BUTTON FRAME 4

101K AE008176 736WPBA013 BUTTON RING 1

101L AE008177 736WPBA014 BUTTON RING 2

101M AE008178 736WPBA015 BUTTON RING 3

101N AE008179 738WPAA072 STOPPER BUTTON

101O AE001848 743WKA0042 SPRING FLAP

101P AE004701 800WFAA015 CUSHION LEG

101Q AE001324 742WKA0001 SPRING DVD-FLAP

102 BZ710466 752WSA0230 SHIELD CASE H/AMP

103 BZ710331 753WUAA006 SPRING EARTH H/AMP

104 BZ710498 85OP700038 HOLDER END SENSOR

105 AE006652 701WPA1363 HOLDER DECK

106 AE006653 701WPA1364 HOLDER DECK

107 AE008293 702WSA0273 PLATE BOTTOM

108 AE008294 7230008089 SHEET JACK

109 BZ710659 752WSA0290 SHIELD COMPO

110 AE003509 753WUA0065 SPRING EARTH

111 AE004703 761WPA0321 HOLDER DVD BL

112 AE007201 761WPA0406 COVER PCB

113 AE008181 761WSAA040 ANGLE FRONT

114 AE006725 702WSA0241 CABINET TOP

115 AE008728 722549A617 SHEET RATING

116 AE008180 752WUAA005 SHIELD JACK

117 AE008243 761WPAA137 HOLDER DECK TOP

118 79091466 761WPA0261 HOLDER DVD BR

119 AE001852 8965TS1010 CUSHION 65TS10-10(10*10*25)

120 AE001853 8965TS1017 CUSHION 65TS10-10(17.5*20*14)

121 AE005122 726000A073 SHEET CAUTION

122 AE007416 800WFA0074 CUSHION LEG

123 AE008297 752WSA0581 SHIELD HDMI

124 AE008298 753WUA0081 SHIELD USB

125 AE008299 761WPA0425 HOLDER USB

126 AE005385 8965TS1015 CUSHION 65TS10-5(10*5*15)

127 AE008300 7230007876 SHEET 20*20*T0.1

128 AE006733 792WHA0603 PACKAGE BACK

129 AE008729 793WCDD226 GIFT BOX

130 AD301577 791WHA0100 GIFT SHEET

131 AE008182 792WHAA187 PACKAGE FRONT

132 AE008730 A2I403H975 INSTRUCTION BOOK KIT

133 AE007590 JB5ND300 POLYBAG INSTRUCTION(RED CAUTION)

134 AE008731 J2I40301A INSTRUCTION BOOK(E)

135 AE008732 J2I40310A INSTRUCTION BOOK(F)

136 AE007852 J5N00629A INFORMATION SHEET(CND)

201 AE008246 8110E2606U SCREW TAP TITE(P)WH10 M2.6*6 CH

202 AE007202 810923053U SCREW TAP TITE(B) R BIND 3*5.3 CH

203 AE003524 8109I30A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH7 3*10 CH

204 AE003526 810923080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*8 CH

205 AE004724 8109K3060U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND(3D) 3*6 CH

206 AE005539 810713040U SCREW TAP TITE(S) PAN 3*4 CH

207 AE003530 811022680U SCREW TAP TITE(P) BIND 2.6*8 CH

208 AE005541 810F13080U SEMS(F) 3*8 CH

209 AE005537 8154D3033U SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH8 3*33R CH

210 AE005540 810722660U SCREW TAP TITE(S) BIND 2.6*6 CH

211 AE006673 8109130B7U SCREW TAP TITE(B)R PAN 3*27 CH

212 AE007212 810213060U SCREW PAN M3*6 CH

213 AE003529 811063080U SCREW TAP TITE(P) BRAZIER 3*8 CH

214 AE008305 8146230F5U SCREW,TAP TITE(B) R-BIND 3*4.2+4*2.3 CH

K1-1

CHASSIS REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

300 AE008141 A2F403H420K DECK ASSY A2F403H420K

301 AE005514 85OA400245 PINCH ROLLER BLOCK VA2

302 AE006679 85OP900759 LEVER,FLAP(S)

303 BZ710193 85OP200290 BELT,CAPSTAN (S)

304 BZ710515 85OP600581 WORM

305 AE005919 85OP500091 BASE,AC HEAD

306 BZ710112 85OP800324 SPRING,AC HEAD

307 AE006676 85OA000529 MAIN CHASSIS ASS'Y(S)

308 BZ710517 85OA200089 CLUTCH ASS'Y

309 AE005920 85OA200092 ARM IDLER ASS'Y

310 AE005836 85OA300068 LOADING ARM S UNIT

311 AE005837 85OA300070 LOADING ARM T UNIT

312 BZ710521 85OA400223 INCLINED BASE T UINT 3S

313 AE005838 85OA400249 P5 ARM ASS'Y 2

314 AE005839 85OA400248 TENSION ARM ASS'Y 2

315 BZ710524 85OA400231 INCLINED BASE S UNIT

316 AE006677 85OA900236 CASS HOLDER ASS'Y(S)

317 BZ710552 85OP900745 CASS,OPENER

318 BZ710106 85OP700035 REFLECTOR,LED

319 AE006678 85OP900756 BRACKET,TOP(S)

320 AE007221 85OP400554 HOLDER,CAPSTAN

321 AE005842 85OA900233 LINK UNIT

322 BZ710531 85OP000496 POST,CASS GUIDE

323 BZ710532 85OP200316 REEL,S (S)

324 BZ710533 85OP200317 REEL,T (S)

325 BZ710534 85OP200308 GEAR,IDLER

326 BZ710535 85OP200311 GEAR,CLUTCH

327 BZ710536 85OP200312 GEAR,COUPLING

328 BZ710537 85OP200313 LEVER,CLUTCH

329 BZ710538 85OP300194 GEAR,MAIN LOADING

330 BZ710092 85OP400490 LEVER,TENSION

331 BZ710093 85OP400492 HOLDER,TENSION

332 BZ710366 85OP400520 CAP.P4

333 BZ710762 85OP400542 BAND,TENSION

334 BZ710540 85OP400533 CONNECT,TENSION

335 BZ710541 85OP600573 ARM,BRAKE T

336 BZ710763 85OP600584 BAND,BRAKE T

337 BZ710543 85OP600577 CAM,PINCH ROLLER

338 BZ710544 85OP600578 CAM,MAIN

339 AE005843 85OP600585 ROD,MAIN

340 BZ710546 85OP600582 GEAR,JOINT

341 BZ710110 85OP800322 SPRING,TENSION

342 BZ710547 85OP800360 SPRING,BRAKE T

343 BZ710548 85OP800355 SPRING,COUPLING

344 BZ710549 85OP800356 SPRING,RING

345 AE005844 85OP900754 LEVER,LINK

501 AE005845 810722680U SCREW,TAP TITE(S) BIND M2.6*8 CH

502 AE005846 83ETW3000U E-RING 3.0

503 AE005847 810722640U SCREW,TAP TITE(S) BIND M2.6*4 CH

504 AE005848 810212060U SCREW,PAN M2*6 CH

505 AE005849 810912660U SCREW,TAP TITE(B) PAN M2.6*6 CH

506 AE005850 810A13040U SCREW/WASHER(A) M3*4 CH

507 AE005851 810A12650U SCREW/WASHER(A) M2.6*5 CH

508 BZ710056 82Q264713N POLYSLIDER WASHER 2.6*4.7*T0.13

509 BZ710054 82P184505N POLYSLIDER WASHER(CUT) 1.8*4.5*T0.5

510 AE005540 810722660U SCREW TAP TITE(S) BIND 2.6*6 CH

CD1501 BZ614292 122H071704 CORD JUMPER 2H071704

CD1502 BZ614339 122Y021902 CORD JUMPER 2Y021902

H5001 AE004714 1523Q91004 HEAD,AUDIO CONTROL VTR-1X2RPE22-772

H5002 AD301676 1543Q02014 HEAD (FULL ERASE) VTR-1X2ERS11-154

! M101 AE005552 1596S98002 MOTOR,LOADING MDB2B66B

! M2001 AE005853 1510S98044 CAPSTAN DD UNIT F2QVB73B

! M2003 AE006792 1589S11025 MICRO MOTOR I20AL34K

! UN4001 AE008130 A2F3PDH500 CYLINDER UNIT ASS'Y A2F3PDH500

K2-1

DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

! 600 AE008191 A2I301H650 DVD MECHA ASS'Y A2I301H650

601 AE005003 92P100109A HOLDER,TRAVERSE

602 AE003550 92P100094A CLAMPER

603 AE003551 92P100088A GEAR,MOTOR

604 AE003537 92AAA0013A FEED RACK ASS'Y

605 AE003538 92P200013A INSULATOR(F)

606 AE003539 92P200014A INSULATOR(R)

607 AE006115 92SBB0029A LOADER SUB ASS'Y

608 AE003541 92P100095A GEAR,PULLEY

609 AE003542 92P100097A PULLEY,MOTOR

610 AE003549 92P100096A GEAR,MAIN

611 AE005810 92P200015A BELT,LOADING

612 AE003545 92P000014A PLATE,CLAMPER

613 AE003546 92P100093A RACK,LOADING

614 AE003547 92P100091A FRAME,MAIN

615 AE003548 92P100092A TRAY

616 AE003535 92P100089A RACK,FEED 1

617 AE003536 92P100090A RACK,FEED 2

618 AE003543 92P300020A SPRING,RACK FEED

619 BZ710149 800WFAA008 CUSHION C

701 AE003530 811022680U SCREW TAP TITE(P) BIND 2.6*8 CH

702 AE003554 814011723U SCREW,PAN M1.7*2.3 P3 CH

703 AE003555 816112080U SEMS.TAP TITE(P) PAN W10 2*8 CH

704 AE003556 814011730U SCREW,PAN M1.7*3 P3 CH

705 AE003557 811022080U SCREW,TAP TITE(P) BIND 2*8 CH

CD2001 AE008247 122J4O1903 CORD JUMPER 127000-2928

CD2301 AE003558 122H062102 CORD JUMPER 2H062102

CD2302 AE003559 122H052601 CORD JUMPER 2H052601

! M2602 AE005930 1515S98003 FEED MOTOR BCZ3B03B

! M2603 AE005931 1596S18003 MOTOR,LOADING BCZ3B52B

PCB610 AE003562 A5M4016610 LOADING MOTOR PCB ASS'Y DED003A

PCB640 AE008143 A5N813W640 SW PCB ASS'Y DED002B

SW1 AE003564 0515S32002 SWITCH SSS-13-2

SW2 AE003565 0500101037 PUSH SWITCH ESE22MH24

K3-1

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

RESISTORS

! R501 BZ210219 R0G3K2335K RC 3.3M OHM 1/2W

! R502 BZ210058 R3X181R68J R,METAL OXIDE 0.68 OHM 1W

! R503 BZ210206 R002T2155J RC 1.5M OHM 1/2W

! R504 AE000145 R002T2561J RC 560 OHM 1/2W

! R512 AE008325 R3K581683J R,METAL OXIDE 68K OHM 1W

! R516 AE005735 R63881R22J R,FUSE 0.22 OHM 1W

! R517 BZ210180 R002T2102J RC 1K OHM 1/2W

! R535 AE000037 R3X28B3R9J R,METAL 3.9 OHM 3W

CAPACITORS

! C501 BZ110119 E02LF2222M CE 2200 UF 16V

! C502 BZ110025 P2122B224M CMP 0.22 UF 275V ECQUL

C504 BZ110076 E02LF1222M CE 2200 UF 10V

! C505 AD301535 E02LU2101M CE 100 UF 16V

! C511 BZ110186 E62QFC470M CE 47 UF 200V

C513 AE000599 C0PLRR712K CC 100 PF 2KV R

! C514 AD301535 E02LU2101M CE 100 UF 16V

! C515 AE001722 C0J0B0514K CC 0.01 UF 500V B

! C516 BZ110256 CC3LE0MH3M CC 0.0022UF 250V

! C518 AE004691 E61FF0222D CE 2200 UF 6.3V

! C519 AD301535 E02LU2101M CE 100 UF 16V

! C522 BZ110205 E02LU5220M CE 22 UF 50V

C525 BZ110172 C03L0R7U2K CC 680 PF 2KV R

! C526 BZ110256 CC3LE0MH3M CC 0.0022UF 250V

! C531 AE001723 C0JTB05S2K CC 560 PF 500V B

! C540 BZ110186 E62QFC470M CE 47 UF 200V

DIODES

D501 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

! D502 BZ410085 D2WXN40050 DIODE,SILICON 1N4005-EIC

! D503 BZ410085 D2WXN40050 DIODE,SILICON 1N4005-EIC

D504 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

! D505 BZ410085 D2WXN40050 DIODE,SILICON 1N4005-EIC

! D506 BZ410085 D2WXN40050 DIODE,SILICON 1N4005-EIC

! D507 AE008220 D2LXFR1550 DIODE,SILICON FR155-F

D508 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

D509 AE002133 D2BXARS010 DIODE,SILICON SARS01-V1

! D510 AE006706 D9WU02202B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ22B-EIC

! D511 AE008248 D2LKSR3400 DIODE,SCHOTTKY SR340-004

D512 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

D514 AE008320 D9WU01102B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ11B-EIC

! D515 AE008248 D2LKSR3400 DIODE,SCHOTTKY SR340-004

D516 AE006709 D9WU05R12B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ5.1B-EIC

D518 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

! D519 AE006710 D9WU06R82B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ6.8B-EIC

! D522 AE008319 D4AT01H3E0 DIODE,RECTIFIER 1H3-E

! D523 AE006707 D9WU03302B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ33B-EIC

D524 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

D526 AE006708 D9WU03R32B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ3.3B-EIC

! D527 BZ410085 D2WXN40050 DIODE,SILICON 1N4005-EIC

! D529 BZ410085 D2WXN40050 DIODE,SILICON 1N4005-EIC

D533 BZ410085 D2WXN40050 DIODE,SILICON 1N4005-EIC

D656 BZ410085 D2WXN40050 DIODE,SILICON 1N4005-EIC

D685 AD301537 0021E5Q210 LED LTL-1CHGE-002A

D686 AD301537 0021E5Q210 LED LTL-1CHGE-002A

D2303 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE,SILICON 1SS355 TE-17

D2304 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE,SILICON 1SS355 TE-17

D3001 AD301638 0010E00330 INFRARED LED LTE-3271T-012A-O

D3002 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

D3007 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

D3009 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

D4002 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE,SILICON 1SS355 TE-17

D4003 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE,SILICON 1SS355 TE-17

D4004 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE,SILICON 1SS355 TE-17

D4005 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE,SILICON 1SS355 TE-17

D5901 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE,SILICON 1SS355 TE-17

D5902 AE004937 D77R1A1R10 DIODE,VARISTA AVRL161A1R1NT

D5903 AE004937 D77R1A1R10 DIODE,VARISTA AVRL161A1R1NT

D6601 AE008321 DD7RB051L0 DIODE,SCHOTTKY RB051L-40_TE25

D8001 AE008193 D9WU01002B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ10B-EIC

D8004 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

D8005 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

D8006 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

D8111 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE,SILICON 1SS355 TE-17

D8112 BZ410086 DD7R0S3550 DIODE,SILICON 1SS355 TE-17

ICS

IC101 AE005890 I03F3206ME IC LA71206M-MPB-E

K4-1

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

ICS

! IC501 AD302211 I1KJ9A431A IC KIA431A-AT

! IC502 AE001070 I1KA98R06A IC KIA78R06API

! IC503 AE002809 000220002W PHOTO COUPLER PS2561AL1-1-V(W)

IC701 AE004692 I03F670BM0 IC LA72670BM-L-MPB-E

! IC2301 AE008194 I03FV65650 IC LA6565VR-TLM-E

IC3001 AE008195 I54F50157B IC OEC0157B

IC3003 AD301641 I9UF032310 IC PST3231NR

IC3099 AE008724 A2I401H015 INIT DATA BR24L02F-WE2

IC4001 AE008323 ICQK068880 IC ZR36888HLCG

! IC4003 AE007825 I07F0C0WF0 IC BA00BC0WFP-E2

! IC4004 AE007825 I07F0C0WF0 IC BA00BC0WFP-E2

IC4005 AE008324 IF9J0164AG IC M12L64164A-7TG

IC4007 AE008725 S2I401HF02 MEMORY DATA SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE

IC6601 AE008322 I4UF097020 IC RT9702-PB

IC8001 AE006711 I04J045800 IC RC4580IDR

IC8002 AD301988 I0UF015010 IC MM1501XNRE

IC8005 AD301988 I0UF015010 IC MM1501XNRE

IC8102 AE003584 I17F017530 IC PCM1753DBQR

TRANSISTORS

Q101 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

Q102 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

Q103 BZ510072 TPAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA103SRTK

Q104 BZ510070 TCAT032034 TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3203_Y-AT

Q105 BZ510073 TAATA12660 TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTA1266-AT(Y,GR)

Q107 BZ510108 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK

Q109 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

! Q501 AE002251 T25F035630 FET 2SK3563(ORION_Q)

! Q502 BZ510070 TCAT032034 TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3203_Y-AT

! Q503 BZ510105 TCAT03209Y TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3209_Y-AT

! Q504 BZ510077 TAAT012714 TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTA1271_Y-AT

! Q505 AE006717 TD3T018350 TRANSISTOR,SILICON 2SD1835S/T-AA

Q506 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

! Q507 BZ510070 TCAT032034 TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3203_Y-AT

Q509 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

! Q510 AE006717 TD3T018350 TRANSISTOR,SILICON 2SD1835S/T-AA

Q513 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

Q514 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

Q651 BZ510108 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK

Q652 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

Q653 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

Q654 BZ510108 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK

Q655 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

Q656 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

Q657 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

Q658 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

Q659 BZ510108 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK

Q660 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

Q661 BZ510108 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK

Q662 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

Q663 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

Q664 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

Q665 BZ510108 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK

Q666 BZ510072 TPAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA103SRTK

Q2301 AE008330 TAAA1505SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P

Q2302 AE008331 TAAA1544T0 TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTA1544T-RTK/P

Q2303 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

Q2304 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

Q2305 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

Q3001 BZ410107 0002700690 PHOTO COUPLER RPI-303

Q3002 BZ410107 0002700690 PHOTO COUPLER RPI-303

Q3003 BZ510072 TPAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA103SRTK

Q3004 BZ410106 0002700680 PHOTO COUPLER RPI-352C40N

Q3005 BZ410106 0002700680 PHOTO COUPLER RPI-352C40N

Q3006 BZ410097 0000M00390 PHOTO TRANSISTOR ST-304L

Q3007 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

Q3008 BZ410097 0000M00390 PHOTO TRANSISTOR ST-304L

Q5901 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

Q5902 BZ510057 TAAT01281Y TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTA1281_Y

Q5903 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

Q5904 BZ510113 T27T030180 FET 2SK3018T106

Q5905 BZ510113 T27T030180 FET 2SK3018T106

Q8001 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

Q8002 BZ510088 TNAAD05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC104SRTK

Q8003 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

Q8004 BZ510073 TAATA12660 TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTA1266-AT(Y,GR)

K4-2

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

TRANSISTORS

Q8005 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

Q8006 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

Q8007 BZ510072 TPAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA103SRTK

Q8008 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

Q8009 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

Q8010 BZ510107 TPAAA05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA101SRTK

Q8011 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

Q8012 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

Q8019 BZ510108 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK

Q8020 BZ510108 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK

Q8021 BZ510108 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK

Q8022 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

COILS &TRANSFORMERS

L101 AE004672 031626010R COIL,BIAS OSC 1626010

L102 BZ310041 02167F101J COIL 100 UH

L103 AE002102 021LA65R6K COIL 5.6 UH

L104 BZ310039 02167F220J COIL 22 UH

L107 BZ310039 02167F220J COIL 22 UH

L301 BZ310039 02167F220J COIL 22 UH

! L501 AE004671 029X000117 COIL,LINE FILTER SS11VL-05230

L502 AD301539 02AHB0A0A4 CORE,FERRITE W5T_20X10X10A

L505 BZ310039 02167F220J COIL 22 UH

L506 AD301785 02167E100K COIL 10 UH

L701 BZ310183 021LA6220J COIL 22 UH

L702 BZ310183 021LA6220J COIL 22 UH

L703 BZ310039 02167F220J COIL 22 UH

L704 BZ310039 02167F220J COIL 22 UH

L705 BZ310039 02167F220J COIL 22 UH

L3003 AE000773 021LA6120J COIL 12 UH

L4001 BZ310191 02167F2R2J COIL 2.2 UH

L5901 AE008306 02D6000073 COIL,CHOKE ACM2012H-900-2P-T

L5902 AE008306 02D6000073 COIL,CHOKE ACM2012H-900-2P-T

L5903 AE008306 02D6000073 COIL,CHOKE ACM2012H-900-2P-T

L5904 AE008306 02D6000073 COIL,CHOKE ACM2012H-900-2P-T

L8001 BZ310147 021LA6R33M COIL 0.33 UH

L8002 BZ310147 021LA6R33M COIL 0.33 UH

L8004 AE002183 021LA6470J COIL 47 UH

L8007 BZ310041 02167F101J COIL 100 UH

L8008 BZ310041 02167F101J COIL 100 UH

L8009 BZ310041 02167F101J COIL 100 UH

L8101 AE000828 02167F1R0K COIL 1 UH

L8102 AE000828 02167F1R0K COIL 1 UH

L8103 AE000828 02167F1R0K COIL 1 UH

L8104 AE000828 02167F1R0K COIL 1 UH

L8105 AE000828 02167F1R0K COIL 1 UH

! T501 AE004673 0481291244 TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING 81291244

JACKS

J651 AE006693 060J421038 RCA JACK MSP-281V30-A

J652 AE008151 060R401119 RCA JACK RCA-109-01

J653 AE008151 060R401119 RCA JACK RCA-109-01

J8001 AE002758 060J411031 RCA JACK MSP-213V1-432_NI_LF

J8002 AE002759 060J431020 RCA JACK MSP-213V2-432_NI_LF

J8006 AE002760 060J411033 RCA JACK MSP-213V1-732_NI_LF

J8007 AE002761 060J411032 RCA JACK MSP-213V1-652_NI_LF

J8008 AE008152 063R700013 JACK DIN-409A

SWITCHES

SW653 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R

SW654 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R

SW655 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R

SW685 AE001707 0504R01T38 SWITCH,TACT EVQ11L05R

SW686 AE001707 0504R01T38 SWITCH,TACT EVQ11L05R

SW687 AE001707 0504R01T38 SWITCH,TACT EVQ11L05R

SW689 AE001707 0504R01T38 SWITCH,TACT EVQ11L05R

SW690 AE001707 0504R01T38 SWITCH,TACT EVQ11L05R

SW691 AE001707 0504R01T38 SWITCH,TACT EVQ11L05R

SW697 AE001707 0504R01T38 SWITCH,TACT EVQ11L05R

SW699 AE001707 0504R01T38 SWITCH,TACT EVQ11L05R

SW3001 BZ612016 0508S11001 SWITCH (LEAF) LSA-1144EAU

P.C.BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PCB010 AE008726 A2I403H010 VCR MT PCB ASS'Y DME063A

PCB130 AE008727 A2I403H130 DVD MT PCB ASS'Y DMF071A

PCB270 AE008316 A2I401H270 OPERATION PCB ASS'Y DEE080A

PCB280 AE008317 A2I401H280 OPERATION 2 PCB ASS'Y DEE081A

PCBDD0 AE008318 A2I401HDD0 USB PCB ASS'Y DEF091A

K4-3

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

MISCELLANEOUS

B501 BZ310122 024HT03563 CORE,BEADS W4BRH3.5X6X1.0X2

B2301 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B2302 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B2303 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B2304 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4001 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4002 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4003 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4004 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4005 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4006 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4007 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4008 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4009 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4010 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4011 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4012 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4013 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4015 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4016 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4017 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4019 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4020 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4021 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B4022 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B5901 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

B6601 AE004602 024HC36001 CORE,BEADS HCB2012K-600T25

B6602 AE004602 024HC36001 CORE,BEADS HCB2012K-600T25

B8001 AE007391 024AC5102F CORE,BEADS BLM18BD102SN1D

B8103 AE005476 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

BT601 AE008217 141U004016 BATTERY,MANGAN MNAAA(R03)

CD102 AE004682 122F041508 CORD,JUMPER 2F041508

CD103 AE007029 W9L6012042 FLAT CABLE AWM2468 AWG26 2C BLACK 120MM

! CD501 AE007346 1209415911 CORD,AC BUSH 9415911

CD682 AE008163 122H070904 CORD,JUMPER 2H070904

CD683 AE007029 W9L6012042 FLAT CABLE AWM2468 AWG26 2C BLACK 120MM

CP101 BZ614011 0697290620 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE TOC-C09X-A1

CP102 AE004674 069J740599 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE IMSA-9604S-04C

CP103 AD301649 067U002019 WIRE HOLDER B2013H02-2P

CP501 BZ614420 069S2D0629 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV2-13P

CP651 AE008153 069J770589 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE IMSA-9604S-07F

CP653 AE008157 069R220589 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 52147-0210

CP682 AE008153 069J770589 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE IMSA-9604S-07F

CP683 AD301649 067U002019 WIRE HOLDER B2013H02-2P

CD4002 AE008310 06CH2D1101 CORD,CONNECTOR CH2D1101

CD6002 AE001243 06CPL02006 CABLE CPL02006

CD6003 AE006433 06CPBA2006 CORD,RCA PIN TD-OR0201R

CD6601 AE008309 06CH251805 CORD,CONNECTOR CH251805

CD8001 AE008313 122F0G1002 CORD,JUMPER 2F0G1002

CP2301 AE008156 069KYOT159 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE LD07T2-24ND-03

CP2302 AE005934 069EV53030 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 00_6232_005_006_800+

CP2303 AE005935 069EV63030 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 00_6232_006_006_800+

CP3001 BZ614289 06972C0010 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE TMC-J12P-B2

CP5901 AE008307 0694YJ3018 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 1903015-3

CP6601 BZ614440 069S250639 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WR2-5P

CP6602 BZ614440 069S250639 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WR2-5P

CP6603 AE008308 069LAA1005 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE C33F-004-5079A

CP8001 AE008155 069J7G0599 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE IMSA-9604S-16C

CP8101 AE008154 069J7G0589 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE IMSA-9604S-16F

! F501 AE001715 081PC2R505 FUSE 51MS025L

FH501 AE002634 06710T0009 HOLDER,FUSE EYF-52BCY

FH502 AE002634 06710T0009 HOLDER,FUSE EYF-52BCY

OS651 AE008160 077A037013 REMOTE RECEIVER ROM-V338LO

OS8001 AE008312 07AA000011 OPTICAL DEVICE RFT5CB1

TM601 AE008311 076D0LM030 TRANSMITTER ORD204UC505913-J

! TU301 AE008150 0162300047 RF UNIT 115-V-HA35ARE G

V651 AE008149 0040N54011 LED DISPLAY TOF-440EBHG-B16/B4

X101 AE001717 100DT3R528 CRYSTAL HC-49/U

X3001 AE004679 100GT01006 CRYSTAL B10000C001

X4001 AE008161 100GT02720 CRYSTAL B27000C005

K4-4

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

RESISTOR

RC..................

CARBON RESISTOR

CAPACITORS

CC..................

CERAMIC CAPACITOR

CE................... ALUMI ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR

CP................... POLYESTER CAPACITOR

CPP................

POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR

CPL................. PLASTIC CAPACITOR

CMP................ METAL POLYESTER CAPACITOR

CMPL.............. METAL PLASTIC CAPACITOR

CMPP.............

METAL POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR

K4-5

TOSHIBA CORPORATION

1-1, SHIBAURA 1-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 105-8001, JAPAN

SDV594

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation